Home

Netopia R2121 User's Manual

Contents

1. System Name System Location System Contact Read Only Community String public Read Write Community String private Authentication Traps Enable Off IP Trap Receivers Configure optional SNMP parameters from here Follow these steps to configure the first three items in the screen 1 Select System Name and enter a descriptive name for the Netopia R2121 s SNMP agent 2 Select System Location and enter the router s physical location room floor building etc 3 Select System Contact and enter the name of the person responsible for maintaining the router System Name System Location and System Contact set the values returned by the Netopia R2121 SNMP agent for the SysName SysLocation and SysContact objects respectively in the MIB4I system group Although optional the information you enter in these items can help a system administrator manage the network more efficiently Community strings The Read Only Community String and the Read Write Community String are like passwords that must be used by an SNMP manager querying or configuring the Netopia R2121 An SNMP manager using the Read Only Community String can examine statistics and configuration information from the router but cannot modify the router s configuration An SNMP manager using the Read Write Community String can both examine and modify configuration parameters Monitoring Tools 13 15 By default the read only and read write community
2. Unknown 0000h Print Queue 0003h File Server 0004h Job Server 0005h Print Server 0007h Archive Server 0009h Remote Bridge Server 0024h Advertising Print Server 0047h Reserved Up To 8000h NetBIOS NetBIOS is a protocol that performs tasks related to the Transport and Session layers of the OSI model It can operate over IPX using a special broadcast packet known as IPX Packet type 20 to communicate with IPX NetBIOS servers IPX Spoofing The Netopia R2121 has several IPX features designed to restrict the traffic on the dial up link when the unit is not sending or receiving IPX data When the link is idle and a user is logged into a Novell server the server will send keep alive packets to ensure the user is still there If the link is idle the keep alive packets will be sent back to the server by the locally connected Netopia R2121 as though they came back from the user without bringing up the dial up link Similarly SPX keep alive packets are treated in this manner IPX RIP and SAP messages will not be sent if the link is down Together these features enable the user to remain connected to a Novell server or SPX peer without bringing up the dial up link except to send and receive actual user data Main System Network Menu Configuration ae IPX Setup The IPX Setup screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of the Netopia R2121 The information you enter here controls how the
3. 6 Toggle or enter any IPX Parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape For more information see IPX Setup on page 11 1 8 4 User s Reference Guide 7 Select Datalink Options and press Return The Datalink Options screen appears Datalink PPP MP Options Data Compression Ascend LZS Send Authentication PAP Send User Name Send Password Receive User Name Receive Password Channel Usage Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation BAP Maximum Packet Size In this Screen you will configure the PPP MP specific connection params You can accept the defaults or change them if you wish Data Compression options are Ascend LZS the default Standard LZS or None Send Authentication options are PAP Password Authentication Protocol the default CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol the secure token protocols PAP TOKEN and CACHE TOKEN or None For more information about token security see Token Security Authentication on page 14 37 If your ISP does not use any of these authentication methods choose None The Send Authentication information is used to authenticate your call to your service provider The Receive Username and Password information is used to authenticate attempted dial in connections m f your ISP uses PAP or PAP TOKEN select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect If you selected PAP select Send Passw
4. Add Export Delete Export 10 8 User s Reference Guide m Select Add Export The Add Exported Service screen appears Add Exported Service Service Local Server s IP Address ADD EXPORT NOW m Select Service A pop up menu of services and ports appears Add Exported Service Service Local Server s IP Address ADD EXPORT NOW 5 Select any of the services ports and press Return to associate it with the address of a server on your local area network For example if we select www http 80 press Return and type 10 0 0 2 The Netopia R2121 will then redirect any incoming traffic destined for a Web server to address 10 0 0 2 Some services such as Timbuktu require the export of multiple TCP ports When you associate Timbuktu with a local server or Timbuktu host all of the major Timbuktu services are exported i e Observe Control Send and Exchange Note If the TCP port of a service you wish to use is not listed you can add it by selecting Other IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 9 Press the Escape key when you are finished configuring Exported Services to go back to the IP Setup screen IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 6 137 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 248 Default IP Gateway 0 0 DNS Server 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 Domain Name Receive RIP Transmit RIP Static Routes Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen
5. select the first radio button If you do this the Known IP ee Address screen appears Shown below If you want to reconfigure the router with a new IP address fe oe oe ee and subnet mask select the second radio button If you do this the New IP Address screen on page 3 9 appears When you have done this click Next Known IP Address screen SmartStart displays a ae recommended address for the router based on the IP wT Hedeses nie ies tobe Inn tata eo address of the computer F ee If you know the router has an IP address different from p the default value enter it now Otherwise accept the A eTa recommended address Ka When you have done this click Next oo SmartStart tests the connection to your router SmartStart then returns you to an Connection Profile g screen on page 3 6 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 9 New IP Address screen If you want to change the z EN router s IP address you enter the new IP address the a Mado da IP adian ara abrat na Phap dP hans subnet mask and the router s serial number in this il Sad taeda mia take et te eS screen Remember the serial number is on the bottom of Paitan the router It is also found in your documentation folio Note Forcing a new IP address may turn off the Netopia mmm R2121 s IP address serving capabilities if you assign an we Saal Mater IP address and subnet mask outside the router s current IP ad
6. when the corresponding line is ringing 2 and 8 flash yellow when the modem has carrier 3 and 9 are green when the line is busy for a non data call 3 and 9 flash red Includes both directly attached and extension phones Red for when the line is not connected and if the phone extension is off the hook orange for when the attached phone is off the hook when the router initiates an incoming or outgoing call 3 and 9 flash green when data is transmitted 4 and 10 flash yellow when data is received 5 and 11 flash yellow when carrier is asserted 6 and 7 are green when data is transmitted or received 6 and 7 flash yellow when data is transmitted or received by the ethernet controller when the Ethernet interface detects a collision 12 flashes yellow 13 flashes red When this happens Making the Physical Connections 2 7 the LEDs when link is detected 14 though 21 are solid green when data is received on their respective ports 14 though 21 flash green 2 8 User s Reference Guide Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 1 Chapter 3 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard Once you ve connected your router to your computer and your telecommunications line and installed a web browser you re ready to run the Netopia SmartStart Wizard The SmartStart Wizard will help you set up the router an
7. ccccececeeeeeeeeees 15 12 Restarting Me SVS te tl sssrinin aa 15 13 Part Ill Appendixes Appendix A TroubleShooting ccccccccccscsssesseeseeseeesesnenseesess A 1 Conngiratiori PODIET eeri ris aor niria E iE A 1 SmartStart Troubleshooting A 2 Console connection problems sescrcsesinnncrosi A 2 Network PIODIGING sccssascctsrnaresosiarosersrnadswdennes A 2 POW CURES ra a A A 3 HSS Tilers LSND E reia A 3 Han DG reach US censi A 3 Appendix B Setting Up Internet Services cenere B 1 Finding an Internet Service Providel ccsseseeseeseeseeeeees B 1 Unigue FEQUIFCIMMIBIRS sisiccscmearessriascdrdeveaseeiadvcesnnes B 2 Pricing and SUG FE viasacctenczers vives ieie B 2 ISP S Point of PRESENCE ciciasmniarveasnaredend B 2 ENGS S MEMS sorrenc eT EAN B 2 Deciding on an ISP account ensnscsicsiensineeninsan B 2 Setting up a Netopia R2121 account B 2 Obtaining an IP host address sasse B 2 STAI E a stents EE B 3 Obtaining information from the ISP B 3 Local LAN IP address information to obtain NAT enabled ccisiiascisoasticdsentiaazasaatnadsenniaaemantaadsass B 3 Local LAN IP address information to obtain MUA TS aS enina na B 3 Appendix C Understanding IP Addressing ceeeeeeeeenees C 1 AOE te PY E E E E E E acne C 1 POGUE IP BOGGS SUNG acectvccacidsieper EAE C 1 Subnets and subnet MASKS ccccceceeeerseseessenees C 2 Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet C 3 viii User s Reference G
8. 255 255 255 128 Remote IP 192 168 1 129 Remote Sub 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Usable IP Addresses avail able to Customer Site A 192 168 1 1 gt 192 168 1 126 Netopia R2121 B IP Address 192 168 1 129 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Remote IP 192 168 1 2 Remote Sub 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 2 Usable IP Addresses available to Customer Site B 192 168 1 129 gt 192 168 1 254 Understanding IP Addressing C 5 Background The IP Addresses and routing configurations for the devices shown in the diagram are outlined below In addition each individual field and its meaning are described The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields define the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the device s Ethernet connection to the network while the Remote IP and Remote Sub fields describe the IP Address and Subnet mask of the remote router This information is entered in the Connection Profile of the Netopia R2121 The Gateway field describes the router or workstation s default gateway or where they will send their packets if the appropriate route is not known The Static Route field which is only shown on Router B tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Netopia R2121 B Finally the Usable IP Address field shows the range of IP Addresses available to the hosts of that network Note that the IP Addresses given in this s
9. 400 Dst Port 80 Dst Port 80 ISP Router to WWW Src IP 200 1 1 40 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 5001 Dst Port 80 WWW to ISP Router Src IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Src Port 80 Dst Port 5001 Netopia to Wkstn A Src IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 192 168 5 2 ISP Router to Netopia Src IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Src Port 80 Src Port 80 Dst Port 5001 Dst Port 400 As you can see the IP packet from Workstation A is sent to the Netopia R2121 and the source IP address is substituted with 200 1 1 40 and the source port is substituted with 5001 then the IP packet checksum is recalculated When this modified packet reaches the WWW Server on the Internet the WWW Server responds and sends the IP packet back to destination IP address 200 1 1 40 and destination port 5001 When the Netopia R2121 receives this IP packet from the WWW Server the Netopia R2121 replaces the destination IP address with 192 168 5 2 the address for Workstation A The port is changed back to 400 the IP packet checksum is recalculated and the IP packet is sent to Workstation A on the Netopia R2121s LAN interface The reasons for the IP address changes are obvious from the diagram above but what is not so obvious is why the TCP or UDP source ports need to be changed as well These are changed and maintained in an internal table so the Netopia R2121 can determine which host on the local
10. Windows 3 1 Workstation MSTCP Version 3 11a The Win3 1 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour The Win3 1 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the user exits Windows and goes to DOS The lease can be manually expired by typing IPCONFIG RELEASE from a DOS window within Windows or from the DOS prompt lt UL gt Macintosh Workstation Open Transport Version 1 1 or later The Mac workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour The Mac workstation will relinquish its address upon shutdown in all but one case If the TCP IP control panel is set to initialize at start up and no IP services are used or the TCP IP control panel is not opened the DHCP address will NOT be relinquished upon shutdown However if the TCP IP control panel is opened or if an IP application is used the Mac WILL relinquish the lease upon shutdown If the TCP IP control panel is set to acquire an address only when needed therefore a TCP IP application must have been launched to obtain a lease the Mac WILL relinquish its lease upon shutdown every time Netopia R2121 DHCP Server Characteristics The Netopia R2121 ignores any leasetime associated with a DHCP request and automatically issues the DHCP address lease for one hour The number of devices a Netopia R2121 can serve DHCP to is 512 This is imposed by global limits on the size of the address serving database which is shared by all address serving fun
11. not supplied SCROLL DOWN Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling Each entry in the list contains the following information Time Time of the event Monitoring Tools 13 7 Date Date of the event Event A brief description of the event Ch The channel involved in the event Dir Number The directory number number dialed involved in the event The first event in each call sequence is marked with double arrows gt gt Failures are marked with an asterisk If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items To scroll up select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and press the Return key To scroll down select the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the list and press the Return key To get more information about any event listed in the WAN Event History select the event and then press the Return key A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear Press Return or the Escape key to dismiss the dialog box To clear the Event History select Clear History at the bottom of the history screen and press Return Device Event History The Device Event History screen lists a total of 128 port and system events giving the time and date for each event as well as a brief description The most recent events appear at the top To go to the Device Event History scre
12. s Reference Guide AppleTalk Setup 12 1 Chapter 12 AppleTalk Setup This chapter discusses the concept of AppleTalk routing and how to configure AppleTalk Setup for a Netopia R2121 with the AppleTalk kit installed AppleTalk support is available as a separate kit for the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Skip this chapter if you do not have the AppleTalk kit This section covers the following topics m AppleTalk networks on page 12 1 a Installing AppleTalk on page 12 4 m Configuring AppleTalk on page 12 6 Note All changes to AppleTalk options require a restart to take effect AppleTalk networks A network is a communication system that connects computers to share information using network services such as electronic mail print spoolers and file servers Information is transferred over a cabling system or WAN using a common set of protocols You can think of the cabling system as an organization of cities streets and buildings and the protocols as the method of sending letters or packages as illustrated on the following pages A cable is the physical medium for example twisted pair or coaxial over which information travels from one device to another AppleTalk protocol AppleTalk is a protocol set for local area networks developed by Apple Computer While initially applied to the LocalTalk cabling system for connecting Macintosh computers and LaserWriters it has been expanded to use other cabling system
13. Associates Inc 1992 Perlman R Interconnections Bridges and Routers Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1992 Perlman R and R Callon The Great IGP Debate Part One ISS and Integrated Routing ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 5 No 10 October 1991 Further Reading F 3 Rose M T The Open Book A Practical Perspective on OSI Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1990 Rose M T The Simple Book An Introduction to Management of TCP IP based Internets Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1991 Ross F E FDDI A Tutorial IEEE Communications Magazine Vol 24 No 5 May 1986 Schlar S K Inside X 25 A Manager s Guide New York New York McGraw Hill Inc 1990 Schwartz M Telecommunications Networks Protocols Modeling and Analysis Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1987 Sherman K Data Communications A User s Guide Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1990 Sidhu G S R F Andrews and A B Oppenheimer Inside AppleTalk 2nd ed Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1990 Siyan Karanjit Internet Firewall and Network Security Indianapolis New Riders Publishing 1995 Similar to the Chapman and Zwicky book Smith Philip Frame Relay Principles and Applications Addison Wesley Publishing Company 1996 Covers information on Frame Relay including the pros and cons of the technolo
14. Follow these steps to configure IP Setup for your Corporate Netopia R2121 Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for the Ethernet IP Address that you entered in the last step Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a default gateway This can be the address of any major router accessible to the Netopia R2121 such as 127 0 0 2 A default gateway should be able to successfully route packets when the Netopia R2121 cannot recognize the intended recipient s IP address A typical example of a default gateway is the a corporate dial in or ISP s router Select DNS Server and enter the IP address for a domain name server The domain name server matches the alphabetic addresses favored by people for example www netopia com to the IP addresses actually used by IP routers for example 163 7 8 202 If a secondary DNS server is available select Secondary DNS Server and enter its IP address The secondary DNS server is used by the Netopia R2121 when the primary DNS server is inaccessible Entering a secondary DNS is useful but it is not necessary Select Domain Name and enter your network s domain name for example netopia com Routing Information Protocol RIP is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Netopia R2121 needs to recognize If this is the case select Receive RIP and s
15. Maximum connect time HH MM 100 00 Viewing call accounting statistics To view call accounting statistics go to the Statistics amp Logs screen from the Main Menu and select Call Accounting Statistics y Menu Logs Main Statistics amp Call Accounting Statistics Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 15 The Call Accounting Statistics screen appears Call Accounting Statistics Aggregate Statistics Profile Statistics If you select Aggregate Statistics the following screen appears Call Accounting Aggregate Statistics Total First Minutes 0 Total Additional Time HH MM 0 00 Remaining Time HH MM 12 00 RESET AGGREGATE MINUTE COUNTERS Trigger Date MDY 11 12 98 Hit Return or Enter to reset Total First Additional Time m Total First Minutes displays the total number of first minutes of outbound calls placed during the recording interval m Total Additional Minutes HH MM displays the total remaining time of all outbound calls placed during the recording interval m Remaining Time HH MM displays how much time is left in the recording interval If call accounting is not 9 16 User s Reference Guide enabled the message will read Aggregate Not Enforced m Trigger Date M DY displays the date in month day year format when the call accounting begins m You can reset the counters by selecting RESET AGGREGATE MINUTE COUNTERS A dialog box will ask you
16. and set the timer to indicate how often a tickle or are you still there packet will be sent to the remote AppleTalk Network The AURP tickle timer is a parameter that you can set anywhere between 0 and 100 hours This parameter tells the AURP partners when to send out an AURP tickle packet If this value is set to 0 the Netopia R2121 will never send out a tickle packet Tickle packets verify that the remote router is working The minimum tickle interval is 90 seconds The maximum tickle interval setting is 99 59 59 100 hours which is the recommendation for small networks AppleTalk Setup 12 11 Raising the tickle packet interval does not ensure that the AURP tunnel is dropped or not brought up If any application on the local network generates AppleTalk traffic destined for the network at the remote end of the AURP tunnel the tunnel remains up For example if a host on the local network connects to a host on the remote network using remote access software the AURP tunnel remains up The AURP tunnel also remains up if a local user selects the Chooser and uses an AppleTalk service that involves a remote zone such as mounting a remote AppleShare volume In many AppleTalk internets individual AppleTalk networks come and go Routers are designed to notify each other at the end of their Update Interval every time there s such a change in the network topology This will cause the Netopia s WAN link to be brought up You can opt to minimize wha
17. dial on demand you may associate a secondary DNS with the other profile See IP setup below for more information on these settings IP setup f Network Main System H Protocols IP Setup Menu Configuration Setup The IP Setup options screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of the Netopia R2121 The information you enter here controls how the Router routes IP traffic Consult your network administrator or Internet Service Provider to obtain the IP setup information such as the Ethernet IP Address Ethernet Subnet Mask Default IP Gateway and DNS Server IP Address you will need before changing any of the settings in this screen Changes made in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia R2121 is reset To go to the IP Setup options screen from the Main Menu select System Configuration and then select Network Protocols Setup and then select IP Setup Note If you have completed SmartStart or Easy Setup the information you have already entered will appear in the IP Setup options screen IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Default IP Gateway 0 0 0 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 0 Domain Name 0 34 194 Exported Services Receive RIP Transmit RIP Static Routes Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 7 Follow these s
18. individual domain name Remote WAN IP address information to obtain m Telephone number of the ISP s local or nearby dial up POP point of presence m PPP authentication type for router at the ISP such as PAP m Send and receive User Login name and Send and receive User Password if PAP or CHAP security authentication is used Local LAN IP address information to obtain NAT disabled If you are not using SmartIP NAT you should obtain m The number of Ethernet IP host addresses available with your account and the first usable IP host address B 4 User s Reference Guide in the address block m The Ethernet IP address for your Netopia R2121 m The Ethernet IP subnet mask address for your Netopia R2121 m The Default Gateway IP Address same as Remote IP Address in most cases m Primary and Secondary Domain Name Server IP Addresses m Domain Name usually the same as the ISP s domain name unless you have registered for your own individual domain name Note If you are not using Network Address Translation you will need to obtain all of the Local LAN IP address information from your ISP Remote WAN IP address information to obtain m The telephone number of the ISP s local or nearby dial up POP point of presence Remote IP address of router at ISP or other remote site m Remote IP subnet mask address of router at ISP or other remote site m PPP authentication type for router at the ISP such as PAP m Send User Login name and
19. on page 56 Select LocalTalk Setup in the AppleTalk Setup screen and press Return to the LocalTalk Routing Setup screen LocalTalk Setup LocalTalk Enabled On LocalTalk Zone Name Unnamed LocalTalk Net Number 33126 Seeding Soft Seeding Use this screen to set up the LocalTalk Port Routing attributes If you are using LocalTalk with the Netopia R2121 select LocalTalk Enabled and make sure LocalTalk is set to On which is the default Note Since the LocalTalk connector attaches to the Auxiliary port on the router that port will no longer be available for a third external modem Select LocalTalk Zone Name and enter a new or existing zone name Note Your LocalTalk network may already have a zone and network number in place For the Netopia R2121 s LocalTalk port to be part of your LocalTalk network it must have a network number and zone name that matches the values in use on the LocalTalk network If another router is already present on the LocalTalk network that you will be connecting to the Netopia R2121 use the zone name and network number used by that router for that LocalTalk network Otherwise your LocalTalk network may experience routing conflicts 12 8 User s Reference Guide As an alternative you can set LocalTalk seeding to soft seeding and let the Netopia R2121 receive the zone name and network number from the other router m Select LocalTalk Network Number and enter the desired network number m Selec
20. select Use Connection Profile and choose from the list of connection profiles you have already created A scheduled connection must be associated with a connection profile to be useful The connection profile becomes active during the times specified in the associated scheduled connection if any exists m Select ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION to save the current scheduled connection Select CANCEL to exit the Add Scheduled Connection screen without saving the new scheduled connection Modifying a scheduled connection To modify a scheduled connection select Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and go to the Change Scheduled Connection screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Scheduled Connection screen except that ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION and CANCEL do not appear To find out how to set them see Adding a scheduled connection on page 9 9 Deleting a scheduled connection To delete a scheduled connection select Delete Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and press the Return key to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected scheduled connection press the Escape key Cost control feature call accounting The Netopia R2121 offers system wide and per connection pro
21. supports a single phone connection Crossover switch a crossover switch with Normal and Uplink positions If Ethernet Port 1 is used for a direct Ethernet connection between a computer and the router set the switch to the Normal position If you are connecting the router to an Ethernet hub use Ethernet port 1 on the router and set the switch to the Uplink position 8 port Ethernet hub Eight Ethernet jacks You will use one of these to configure the Netopia R2121 For a new installation you use the Ethernet connection SmartStart only works over Ethernet Later if you want to do some advanced configuration you can Telnet to the Console based management screens via the Ethernet connection You may also use the Console connection to run the Console based management using a direct serial connection You may either connect your computer directly to any of the Ethernet ports on the router or connect both your computer and the router to an existing Ethernet hub on your LAN 2 6 User s Reference Guide Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Status Lights The figure below represents the Netopia R2121 status light LED panel Netopia R2121 LED front panel 8 91011 12 13 141516171819 20 21 OK amp e 9 RRC Pas Ethernet Pay Ser ore a Ee R S Link Receive SAS N 4 ow eo Ra aS CM CRP WO Modem1 Modem2 LAN The following table summarizes the meaning of the various LED states and colors When this happens the LEDs
22. your ISP gave you If your ISP uses CACHE TOKEN select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect Select Send Password and enter your password 7 Select NEXT SCREEN and press Return The IP Easy Setup screen appears IP Easy Setup The IP Easy Setup screen is where you enter information about your Netopia Router s m P address m Subnet mask m Default gateway IP address m Domain name server IP address m P address serving information such as the number of client IP addresses and the 1st client address and You should consult with your network administrator to obtain the information you will need For more information about setting up IP see IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 Easy Setup 7 5 IP Easy Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Domain Name Primary Domain Name Server Default IP Gateway IP Address Serving Number of Client IP Addresses 100 lst Client Address 192 168 1 100 PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Set up the basic IP amp IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the first IP address from the IP address range your ISP has given you This will be the Netopia Router s IP address If Network Address Translation is enabled in the Easy Setup connection profile the Ethernet IP Address defaults to an addres
23. 1 elco 2 Your first Telco number is carried on the inner pair and the second number on the outer pair If you have a second phone line with its own separate wall outlet and want to use both built in modems connect one end of one of the RJ 11 cables to the Telco 2 port and the other end to your second wall outlet Connect the Ethernet cable to any of the Ethernet ports on the router If you are connecting the router to an existing Ethernet hub use Ethernet port 1 on the router and set the crossover switch to the Uplink position You should now have the power adapter plugged in the Ethernet cable connected between the router and your computer and the telephone cables connected between the router and the wall outlets Insert your Netopia CD and follow the instructions to install an Internet browser and the Adobe Acrobat Reader if you don t already have them Now run the SmartStart application SmartStart requires the following m your computer must be Ethernet capable that is it must have both an Ethernet card and TCP IP stack software See Before running SmartStart on page 3 1 m your computer and the Netopia R2121 are powered ON m the computer running SmartStart and the Netopia R2121 to be configured must be on the same Ether net segment there can be no intervening routers Repeaters such as 10Base T hubs are acceptable Go to the section Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard on pa
24. 14 1110 46 101110 78 1001110 110 1101110 15 1111 47 101111 79 1001111 111 1101111 16 10000 48 110000 80 1010000 112 1110000 17 10001 49 110001 81 1010001 113 1110001 18 10010 50 110010 82 1010010 114 1110010 19 10011 51 110011 83 1010011 115 1110011 20 10100 52 110100 84 1010100 116 1110100 21 10101 53 110101 85 1010101 117 1110101 22 10110 54 110110 86 1010110 118 1110110 23 10111 55 110111 87 1010111 119 1110111 24 11000 56 111000 88 1011000 120 1111000 25 11001 57 111001 89 1011001 121 1111001 26 11010 58 111010 90 1011010 122 1111010 27 11011 59 111011 91 1011011 123 1111011 28 11100 60 111100 92 1011100 124 1111100 29 11101 61 111101 93 1011101 125 1111101 30 11110 62 111110 94 1011110 126 1111110 31 11111 63 111111 95 1011111 127 1111111 E 2 User s Reference Guide Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 128 10000000 160 10100000 192 11000000 224 11100000 129 10000001 161 10100001 193 11000001 225 11100001 131 10000011 163 10100011 195 11000011 227 11100011 133 10000101 165 10100101 197 11000101 229 11100101 135 10000111 167 10100111 199 11000111 231 11100111 137 10001001 169 10101001 201 11001001 233 11101001 139 10001011 171 10101011 203 11001011 235 11101011 141 10001101 173 10101101 205 11001101 237 11101101 143 10001111 175 10101111 207 11001111 239 11101111 145 10010001 177 10110001 209 11010001 241 11110001 147 10010011 179 10110011 211 11010011 243 11110011 149 10010101 181 10110101 213
25. 255 255 0 This way all packets with a source address of 200 233 14 x will be matched correctly no matter what the final address byte is Note The protocol attribute for this filter is 0 by default This tells the filter to ignore the IP protocol or type of IP packet Design guidelines Careful thought should go into designing a new filter set You should consider the following guidelines m Be sure the filter set s overall purpose is clear from the beginning A vague purpose can lead to a faulty set and that can actually make your network less secure m Be sure each individual filter s purpose is clear m Determine how filter priority will affect the set s actions Test the set on paper by determining how the filters would respond to a number of different hypothetical packets m Consider the combined effect of the filters If every filter in a set fails to match on a particular packet the packet is passed if all the filters are configured to discard not forward m discarded if all the filters are configured to pass forward discarded if the set contains a combination of pass and discard filters 14 12 User s Reference Guide Disadvantages of filters Although using filter sets can greatly enhance network security there are disadvantages m Filters are complex Combining them in filter sets introduces subtle interactions increasing the likelihood of implementation errors mw Enabling a large number of filters c
26. 29 Show Filters Change Actions on Match Filter Name Forward Filter 1 No Filter 2 No lt lt NO MATCH gt gt Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here Select a filter and toggle the entry forwarding action to Yes pass or No discard 3 To add a filter to the filter set select Append Filter to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to add it to the filter set The default action of newly added filters is to not forward discard packet entries that match their criteria To exit the table without adding the filter press the Escape key 4 To remove a filter from the filter set select Detach Filter to display a table of appended filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to remove it from the set To exit the table without removing the filter press the Escape key 5 Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set Select CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter Set screen without saving the new filter set Deleting a SAP filter set To delete a SAP filter set select Delete IPX SAP Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set Note Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set However the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect unless they are part
27. Address Translation feature of SmartIP SmartIP The Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog supports the SmartIP feature which includes Network Address Translation Network Address Translation provides Internet access to the network connected to the Netopia R2121 using only a single IP address These routers translate between the internal or local area network LAN addresses and a single external IP address and route accordingly For more information on Network Address Translation see Chapter 10 IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation Obtaining information from the ISP After your account is set up the ISP should send you the IP parameter information that will help you to configure the Netopia R2121 Local LAN IP address information to obtain NAT enabled If you are using SmartIP NAT you should obtain the following m If you are dialing out to a remote site using Network Address Translation on your router your provider will not define the IP address information on your local LAN You can define this information based on parameters defined by another connection profile such as that to a corporate network or an IP configuration that may already be in place for the existing network Alternatively you can use the default IP address range used by the router m Primary and Secondary Domain Name Server DNS IP Addresses m Domain Name usually the same as the ISP s domain name unless you have registered for your own
28. CD and in the desktop navigation screen that appears launch the SmartStart Wizard application SmartStart Wizard configuration screens The screens described in this section are the default screens shipped on the Netopia CD They derive from two initialization ini files included in the same directory as the SmartStart application file Your reseller or your ISP may have supplied you with customized versions of these files m If you have received a CD or diskette that has been customized by your reseller or ISP you can run the SmartStart Wizard directly from the CD or diskette and follow the instructions your reseller or ISP provides This makes your Netopia R2121 configuration even easier If you have received only the ini files from your reseller or ISP perform the following Copy the entire directory folder containing the SmartStart Wizard application from the Netopia CD to your hard disk m Copy the customized ini files to the same directory folder that contains the Smart Start Wizard application allowing the copy process to overwrite the original ini files m Run the SmartStart Wizard from your hard disk You can then follow the instructions your reseller or ISP provides The SmartStart Wizard presents a series of screens to guide you through the preliminary configuration of a Netopia R2121 It will then create a connection profile using the information you supply to it Welcome screen The first screen welcomes you to
29. Check that the terminal emulation software is accessing the correct port on the computer that s being used as a console m Try pressing Ctrl L or Return or the A up or down key several times to refresh the terminal screen m Check that flow control on serial connections is turned off Junk characters appear on the screen m Check that the terminal emulation software is configured correctly m Check the baud rate The default values are 9600 N 8 and 1 Characters are missing from some of the configuration screens m Try changing the Netopia R2121 s default speed of 9600 bps and setting your terminal emulation software to match the new speed Network problems This section contains tips on ways you can troubleshoot a networking problem Problems communicating with remote IP hosts m Verify the accuracy of the default gateway s IP address entered in the IP Setup or Easy Setup screen m Use the Netopia R2121 s ping utility in the Statistics Tests Utilities screen and try to ping local and remote hosts See Ping on page 15 2 for instructions on how to use the ping utility If you can successfully ping hosts using their IP addresses but not their domain names 198 34 7 1 but not garcia netopia com for example verify that the DNS server s IP address is correct and that it is reachable from the Netopia R2121 use ping m If you are using filters check that your filter sets are not blocking the type of connections you are
30. Data Compression Ascend LZS Send Authentication PAP TOKEN Send User Name Receive User Name Receive Password Channel Usage Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation Auto Maximum Packet Size 1500 In this Screen you will configure the PPP MP specific connection params 2 Select Send Authentication and press Return From the pop up menu highlight PAP TOKEN or CACHE TOKEN Your network administrator or the remote network administrator will tell you which method to select If you select PAP TOKEN select Send User Name and enter a name for your Netopia R2121 You will not need to enter a Send Password for PAP TOKEN Press Return If you select CACHE TOKEN select Send User Name and enter a name for your Netopia R2121 Then select Send Password and enter a secret name or number Press Return 3 Setup a connection profile to use with your authentication method For information on setting up a connection profile see Chapter 7 Easy Setup Note If you are setting up your first connection profile you can also enter your authentication information in the Easy Setup Connection Profile screen Connecting using security authentication You can initiate a connection call using security authentication in either of two ways m establish a dial on demand DOD connection or m establish a manual connection Establishing a dial on demand DOD connection call To establish a connection call using DOD select Utilities amp Diagno
31. Digital Equipment Corporation 12 Crosby Drive Bedford MA 01730 Malamud C Analyzing DECnet OSI Phase V New York New York Van Nostrand Reinhold 1991 Malamud C Analyzing Novell Networks New York New York Van Nostrand Reinhold 1991 Malamud C Analyzing Sun Networks New York New York Van Nostrand Reinhold 1991 Martin J SNA IBM s Networking Solution Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1987 Martin J with K K Chapman and the ARBEN Group Inc Local Area Networks Architectures and Implementa tions Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1989 Medin M The Great IGP Debate Part Two The Open Shortest Path First OSPF Routing Protocol ConnexXions The Interoperability Report Vol 5 No 10 October 1991 Meijer A Systems Network Architecture A tutorial New York New York John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1987 Miller A Mark Analyzing Broadband Networks Frame Relay SMDS amp ATM M amp T Books A Division of MIS Press 1994 An intermediate advanced reference on Frame Relay technologies Miller M A Internetworking A Guide to Network Communications LAN to LAN LAN to WAN 2nd ed San Mateo California M amp T Books 1992 Miller M A LAN Protocol Handbook San Mateo California M amp T Books 1990 Miller M A LAN Troubleshooting Handbook San Mateo California M amp T Books 1989 O Reilly T and G Todino Managing UUCP and Usenet 10th ed Sebastopol California O Reilly amp
32. Enter to Edit WAN and System Configuration 8 7 Select the connection profile you want to view or edit and press Return The profile is displayed and you can change any of the parameters Changes take effect immediately without rebooting the router Change Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 02 Profile Enabled Yes IP Enabled Yes IP Profile Parameters IPX Enabled No Data Link Encapsulation is Data Link Options Telco Options Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Modify Connection Profile here Changes are immediate Deleting connection profiles You can delete a connection profile by returning to the WAN Configuration menu and selecting Delete Connection Profile A scrolling pop up screen appears Select the profile you want to delete and press Return When prompted select CONTINUE and the connection profile will be deleted WAN Configuration IP Address IPX Network Easy Setup Profile 127 0 0 2 Profile 02 0 0 0 0 Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Delete 8 8 User s Reference Guide System Configuration screens You can connect to the Netopia R2121 s System Configuration screens m Using Telnet with the Router s Ethernet port IP address m Through the console port using a local terminal see Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 You can also retrieve the Netopia R2
33. LAN interface sent the IP packet and what host the response from the WAN interface is going to go to on the LAN interface This becomes especially important when two or more hosts on the LAN interface are accessing the same type of service on the Internet like a WWW Server Port 80 for example Now look at how two hosts on the LAN interface accessing the same WWW Server on the Internet will work D 4 User s Reference Guide Netopia Router WWW Ser ver ISP Router LAN 192 168 5 1 Workstations 163 176 4 32 200 1 1 1 WAN 200 1 1 40 pa ISP Router to WWW Netopia to ISP Router Wkstn A to Netopia Src IP 200 1 1 40 Src IP 200 1 1 40 Src IP 192 168 5 2 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 5001 Src Port 5001 Src Port 400 Dst Port 80 Dst Port 80 Dst Port 80 Wkstn B to Netopia Netopia to ISP Router Src IP 192 168 5 3 Src IP 200 1 1 40 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 400 Src Port 5002 Dst Port 80 Dst Port 80 ISP Router to WWW Src IP 200 1 1 40 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 5002 Dst Port 80 T WWW to ISP Router Src IP 163 176 4 32 ISP Router to Netopia Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Src IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 80 Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Dst Port 5002 Src Port 80 OES Netopia to Wkstn B Src IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 192 168 5 3 Dst Port 5002 Dst Port 400 WWW to ISP Router ISP Router to Netopia Netopia to Wkstn A Src IP 163 176 4 32 Src I
34. MaclP address assignments are normally temporary although you may also use static IP addresses with MaclP Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time make sure that the addresses distributed by the Netopia R2121 and those that are manually configured are not the same Each method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw from IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 17 To go to the IP Address Serving screen select IP Address Serving in the System Configuration screen and press Return IP Address Serving Number of Client IP Addresses 5 lst Client Address 192 168 6 138 Client Default Gateway 192 168 6 137 Serve DHCP Clients DHCP NetBios Options Serve BOOTP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Serve MacIP KIP Clients MacIP KIP Static Options Enter the maximum number of dynamic IP clients to support Configure Address Serving DHCP BOOTP etc here Follow these steps to configure IP Address Serving If you enabled IP Address Serving either by using SmartStart or in Easy Setup DHCP BootP clients Dynamic WAN clients and MacIP KIP clients if you have the AppleTalk kit installed are automatically enabled Select Number of Client IP Addresses and enter the total number of contiguous IP addresses that the Netopia R2121 will distribute to the client machines on your local area network In the screen example shown above five Client IP addresse
35. Netopia R2121 to different types of networks Readying computers on your local network PC and Macintosh computers must have certain components installed before they can communicate through the Netopia R2121 The following illustration shows the minimal requirements for a typical PC or Macintosh computer 5 2 User s Reference Guide Application software TCP IP stack Ethernet EtherTalk LocalTalk Driver Your PC or Macintosh computer To the Netopia R2121 Application software This is the software you use to send e mail browse the World Wide Web read newsgroups etc These applications may require some configuration Examples include the Eudora e mail client and the web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator TCP IP stack This is the software that lets your PC or Macintosh communicate using Internet protocols TCP IP stacks must be configured with some of the same information you used to configure the Netopia R2121 There are a number of TCP IP stacks available for PC computers Windows 95 includes a built in TCP IP stack See Configuring TCP IP on Windows 95 98 or NT computers on page 3 9 Macintosh computers use either MacTCP or Open Transport See Configuring TCP IP on Macintosh computers on page 3 13 Ethernet Ethernet hardware and software drivers enable your PC or Macintosh computer to communicate on the LAN EtherTalk and LocalTalk These are AppleTalk protocols use
36. Note When using CACHE TOKEN your passcode is valid for a time interval determined by the network administrator When this time interval expires you must provide a new passcode for the call negotiation When using PAP TOKEN for a dial up call your passcode is valid for one call negotiation For a second call negotiation you must enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication token card every 60 seconds You will be able to access information at the remote site that you are connecting to once authentication is successfully completed 14 42 User s Reference Guide Utilities and Diagnostics 15 1 Chapter 15 Utilities and Diagnostics A number of utilities and tests are available for system diagnostic and control purposes Ping on page 15 2 Trace Route on page 154 Telnet client on page 15 5 Secure Authentication Monitor on page 15 6 Disconnect Telnet Console Session on page 15 7 Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP on page 15 7 Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM on page 15 10 Factory defaults on page 15 7 Restarting the system on page 15 13 Note These utilities and tests are accessible only through the console based management screens See Chapter 6 Console based Management for information on accessing the console based management screens You access the Utilities amp Diagnostics screens from the Main Men
37. Parameters and go to the IPX Parameters Default Answer Profile screen The items in this screen are similar to the IPX Profile Parameters items of the same name see page 11 5 IPX Parameters Default Answer Profile NetBios Packet Forwarding off Incoming Packet Filter Set Outgoing Packet Filter Set Incoming SAP Filter Set Outgoing SAP Filter Set Detach Filter Sets Periodic RIP Timer 60 Periodic SAP Timer 60 Configure IPX values to use when no matching Profile can be found IPX routing tables IPX Setup 11 7 Main Menu Statistics amp Logs IPX Routing Table IPX SAP Bindery Table IPX routing tables provide information on current IPX routes and services To go to the IPX Routing Table screen select IPX Routing Table in the Routing Tables screen This table shows detailed information about current IPX network routes IPX Routing Table Net Addr Hops Ticks Type Status Interface 00000020 00000030 00000033 00000100 00000110 UPDATE Active Active Active Active Active SCROLL UP Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet 00000120 00000c465c2 00000120 00000c465c2 000000120 00000c465c2f 00000120 00000c465c2 00000120 00000c465c2 To go to the IPX SAP Bindery Table screen select IPX SAP Bindery Table in the Routing Tables screen This table shows detailed information about available IPX services and their location 11 8 User
38. Quick View screen select Quick View in the Main Menu Main Menu OT Quick View The Quick View screen has three status sections m General status m Current WAN Connection Status m LED Status The status sections vary according to the interface of your Netopia R2121 13 2 User s Reference Guide General Status Quick View 11 16 1998 04 40 47 PM Default IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 CPU Load 10 Unused Memory 541 KB Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Call Acct Disabled Domain Name None Provided LocalTalk Address 34448 149 MAC Address IP Address IPX Address EtherTalk Ethernet Hub 00 00 c5 70 03 48 192 163 1 1 34449 150 Current WAN Connection Status Profile Name State Use Remote Address More Info ISP Pl 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lcl NAT 192 163 100 6 LED Status PWR MODEM1 CON AUX MODEM2 EN RNG DCD TX RX LNK LNK RNG DCD TX RX DATA 0 Current Date The current date this can be set with the Date and Time utility see Date and Time on page 8 11 Default IP Gateway The router s default gateway which may be either manually configured or learned via DHCP This is the value you assigned in the Default IP Gateway field on page 7 5 If you are using the router s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your default gateway it is shown here CPU Load Percentage of the system s resources being used by all curr
39. Sap Filter Set Delete IPX Sap Filter Set Define your filters lst IPX Filter Sets refer to but don t contain filters Security 14 23 The items in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen are grouped into four areas m PX packet filters m PX packet filter sets m PX SAP filters m PX SAP filter sets The following sections explain the items in each of these areas IPX packet filters For each IPX packet filter you can configure a set of parameters to match on the source or destination attributes of IPX data packets coming from or going to the WAN Viewing and modifying packet filters To display a view only table of IPX packet filters select Show Change IPX Packet Filters in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen To modify any of the filters in the table note the desired filter and press Return to go to the Change Packet Filter screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Packet Filter screen see the next section Adding a packet filter To add a new IPX packet filter select Add IPX Packet Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add Packet Filter screen Add Packet Filter Filter Name IPX Filter 1 Source Network 00000000 Source Node Address 000000000000 Source Socket 0000 Destination Network 00000000 Destination Node Address 000000000000 0000 Destination Socket ADD FILTER NOW CANCEL Configure a new IPX Packet Filter Finished
40. Send User Password if PAP or CHAP security authentication is used Note If you are not using Network Address Translation you will need to obtain all of the Remote WAN IP address information from your ISP Understanding IP Addressing C 1 Appendix C Understanding IP Addressing This appendix is a brief general introduction to IP addressing A basic understanding of IP will help you in configuring the Netopia R2121 and using some of its powerful features such as static routes and packet filtering In packets a header is part of the envelope information that surrounds the actual data being transmitted In e mail a header is usually the address and routing information found at the top of messages This section covers the following topics m What is IP on page C 1 m About IP addressing on page C 1 m Distributing IP addresses on page C5 m Nested IP subnets on page C 11 m Broadcasts on page C 13 What is IP All networks use protocols to establish common standards for communication One widely used network protocol is the Internet Protocol also known as IP Like many other protocols IP uses packets or formatted chunks of data to communicate Note This guide uses the term IP in a very general and inclusive way to identify all of the following m Networks that use the Internet Protocol along with accompanying protocols such as TCP UDP and ICMP m Packets that include an IP header within t
41. The default setting is adequate in most cases but you may change it to any value from 1 to 4 294 967 295 3 Select Data Size to change the default setting This is the size in bytes of each Ping packet sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you may change it to any value from 0 only header data to 1664 4 Select Delay seconds to change the default setting The delay in seconds determines the time between Ping packets sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you may change it to any value from 0 to 4 294 967 A delay of 0 seconds forces packets to be sent immediately one after another 5 Select START PING and press Return to begin the Ping test While the test is running the START PING item becomes STOP PING To manually stop the Ping test select STOP PING and press Return or the Escape key Utilities and Diagnostics 15 3 While the Ping test is running and when it is over a status field and a number of statistical items are active on the screen These are described below Status The current status of the Ping test This item can display the following messages Message Description Resolving host name Finding the IP address for the domain name sstyle address Can t resolve host name IP address can t be found for the domain name style name Pinging Ping test is in progress Complete Ping test was completed Cancelled by user Ping test was cancelled manually Destina
42. addresses on its LAN interface The Netopia R2121 uses a one to many IP address mapping scheme that is against a single IP address the Netopia R2121 acquires on its WAN interface the Netopia R2121 can proxy 14 30 or an unlimited number of IP hosts on the LAN interface In order to fully understand how NAT works you must understand how a PPP connection is established and IP addresses are negotiated D 2 User s Reference Guide When the Netopia R2121 establishes a connection over its WAN interface with another router it uses the Point to Point Protocol PPP Within PPP there is a Network Control Protocol NCP called Internet Protocol Control Protocol IPCP which handles the negotiation of IP addresses between the two routers in this case the Netopia R2121 at the customer site above and the Router at the Internet Service Provider ISP If the Netopia R2121 calls the Router at the ISP with NAT disabled the Netopia negotiates its LAN interface address as specified in IP Setup within the Netopia R2121 s console with the Router at the ISP through IPCP and then sets up routing From the previous diagram you can see that the address for the Netopia R2121 is 192 168 5 1 and the address of the Router at the ISP is 200 1 1 1 Assuming that the addresses negotiated by the routers are valid and unique for the Internet the Netopia R2121 and the hosts on its LAN would be able to access the Internet If the Netopia R2121 calls the Router at the ISP wit
43. and subnet mask for the single subnet on the IP Setup screen This screen displays up to eight rows of two editable columns preceded by a row number between one and eight If you have eight subnets configured there will be eight rows on this screen Otherwise there will be one more row than the number of configured subnets The last row will have the value 0 0 0 0 in both the IP address and subnet mask fields to indicate that you can edit the values in this row to configure an additional subnet All eight row labels are always visible regardless of the number of subnets configured m To add an IP subnet enter the Netopia R2121 s IP address on the subnet in the IP Address field in a IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 11 particular row and the subnet mask for the subnet in the Subnet Mask field in that row For example IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 192 128 152 162 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m To delete a configured subnet set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0 0 0 0 either explicitly or by clearing each field and pressing Return or Enter to commit the change When a configured subnet is deleted the values in subsequent rows adjust up to fill the vacant fields Note that the subnets configured on this screen are tied to the address serving pools configured on the IP Address Pools screen and that changes on this screen may affect the IP Address Pools screen In p
44. any packets coming in from the Internet with the defined destination TCP or UDP port of Port 21 FTP to be redirected to a host on the local LAN interface For example suppose the WWW Server on the Internet with the IP address of 163 176 4 32 wants to access Workstation B on the Netopia R2121s local LAN interface which is operating as an FTP Server The IP address for Workstation B is 192 168 5 3 which is not a valid IP address and thus the WWW Server on the Internet can not use this IP address to access Workstation B The WWW Server on the Internet would then have to use the single valid IP address that was acquired on the Netopia R2121 s WAN interface to access any host on the Netopia R2121 s local LAN interface since this is the only valid address for the Internet But if the WWW Server on the Internet opens a connection to 200 1 1 40 via Port 21 FTP and no Exported Services are defined on the Netopia R2121 the Netopia R2121 will discard the incoming packet since the Netopia R2121 itself does not perform the requested service Thus you can see why Exported Services are necessary In the example above an Exported Service needs to be defined within the Netopia R2121 redirecting any incoming IP traffic with a destination port of 21 to the host on the local LAN interface with the IP address of 192 168 5 3 If the WWW Server on the Internet then tries to open a connection to the IP address of 200 1 1 40 with the appropriate Exported Service defin
45. as page size data transmission speed and timing options port A location for passing data in and out of a device and in some cases for attaching other devices or cables port number A number that identifies a TCP IP based service Telnet for example is identified with TCP port 23 POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Ordinary analog telephone service such as that used for voice transmission as distinct from digital service PPP Point to Point Protocol A protocol for framing IP packets and transmitting them over a Serial line protocol A set of rules for communication sometimes made up of several smaller sets of rules also called protocols AppleTalk is a protocol that includes the LocalTalk EtherTalk and TokenTalk protocols 6 User s Reference Guide remapping See network number remapping RFC Request for Comment A series of documents used to exchange information and standards about the Internet RIP Routing Information Protocol A protocol used for the transmission of IP routing information RJ 11 A telephone industry standard connector type usually containing four pins RJ 45 A telephone industry standard connector type usually containing eight pins router A device that supports network communications A router can connect identical network types such as LocalTalk to LocalTalk or dissimilar network types such as LocalTalkto Ethernet However unless a gateway is available a common protocol such as
46. at that particular time The token card has a display that authorizes the individual user access to the computer Through this authentication system the user s identity is verified when the correct password and current code are entered from the user s token Personal identification number PIN The user s password is called a personal identification number or PIN The user enters the secret PIN from a console connection followed by the current code displayed on the token card Then the access control module must authenticate the token s unique code in combination with the user s secret PIN before access is granted Key Security Authentication Features of the Netopia R2121 As a remote device the Netopia R2121 offers client calling side security authentication This feature allows the Netopia R2121 to call a server router and perform security card authentication The router of the called server must have access to a server with ACE software loaded on it To perform security card authentication each user must have a security authentication token card and a PIN In addition the user s identifying information must reside on the remote ACE servers for authentication negotiation to properly take place 14 38 User s Reference Guide The Netopia R2121 supports the following user configurations for security authentication m Single user calling a single destination single session m Single user calling multiple destinations two simultan
47. cannot further subnet your network without the risk of creating network routing problems since you must use the mask issued by the ISP This however is not a problematic limitation for your small network The advantages to this situation is the greater ease and lower cost of obtaining a subnet from an ISP rather than a full Class C address Distributing IP addresses To set up a connection to the Internet you may have obtained a block of IP host addresses from an Internet service provider When configuring the Netopia R2121 you gave one of those addresses to its Ethernet port leaving a number of addresses to distribute to computers on your network C 6 User s Reference Guide There are two schemes for distributing the remaining IP addresses m Manually give each computer an address m Let the Netopia R2121 automatically distribute the addresses These two methods are not mutually exclusive you can manually issue some of the addresses while the rest are distributed by the Netopia R2121 Using the Router in this way allows it to function as an address server One reason to use the Netopia R2121 as an address server is that it takes less time than manually distributing the addresses This is particularly true if you have many addresses to distribute You only need to enter information once rather than having to repeatedly enter it on each host separately This also reduces the potential for misconfiguring hosts Another reason to use th
48. check the following m The Netopia R2121 is turned on m An Ethernet cable connects your PC s Ethernet card or built in Ethernet port to the Netopia R2121 m The SmartStart application is running and able to access the Netopia R2121 m Telnet is available on your PC or Macintosh On a PC it must be specified in your system path You can usually find the application as c windowselnet exe m Your PC or Macintosh is properly configured for TCP IP m Your PC or Macintosh has an IP address m Your PC or Macintosh has a subnet mask that matches or is compatible with the Netopia R2121 s subnet mask m f you are entering a new IP address via SmartStart be sure the correct serial number was entered Note If you are attempting to modify the IP address or subnet mask from a previous successful configuration attempt you will need to clear the IP address or reset your Netopia R2121 to the factory default before reinitiating the configuration process For further information on resetting your Netopia R2121 to factory default see Factory defaults on page 15 7 A 2 User s Reference Guide SmartStart Troubleshooting The Status field of the SmartStart application will display information and indicate problems as they are detected Console connection problems Can t see the configuration screens nothing appears m Check the cable connection from the Netopia R2121 s console port to the computer being used as a console m
49. exit the table without deleting the filter IPX packet filter sets Before the individual filters can be used IPX packet filters must be grouped into sets A filter can be part of more than one filter set Viewing and modifying packet filter sets To display a table of IPX packet filter sets select Show Change IPX Packet Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen To modify any of the filter sets in the list select the desired filter set and press Return to go to the Change Packet Filter Set screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Packet Filter Set screen see the next section Adding a packet filter set To add a new IPX packet filter set select Add IPX Packet Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add Packet Filter Set screen Security 14 25 Add Packet Filter Set Filter Set Name Show Filters Change Action on Match Append Filter Remove Filter ADD FILTER SET NOW CANCEL Configure an IPX Filter Set here You must ADD FILTER SET NOW to save Follow these steps to configure the new packet filter set 1 Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter set 2 To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set select Show Filters Change Action on Match and press Return to go to the Show Filters Change Actions on Match screen Show Filters Change Actions on Match Filter Name Forward Fi
50. farallon com Requested Connect to our DN 5108645534 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com ASYNC Modem carrier detected more Modem reports 26400 V34 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 activated at 115 Kbps Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com Connect Confirmed to our DN 5108645534 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP Channel 1 up Answer Profile name Default Profile Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP NCP up session 1 Channel 1 Final fallback negotiated auth Local PAP Remote NONE Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP PAP we accepted remote Channel 1 Remote name guest Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP MP negotiated session 1 Remote EDO 06 03 0000C5700624 0 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP CCP negotiated session 1 type Ascend LZS Local mode 1 Remote mode 1 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP BACP negotiated session 1 Local MN FFFFFFFF Remote MN 00000001 Nov 5 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP IPCP negotiated session 1 rem 192 168 10 100 local 192 168 1 1 Nov 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 deactivated Nov 2 14 06 tsnext farallon com Received Clear Ind from DN 5108645534 Cause 0 Nov 2 14 06 tsnext farallon com Issued Clear Response to DN 5108645534 Nov 2 14 06 tsnext farallon com Link 1 down Remote clearing Nov 2 14 06 tsnext farallon com PPP IPCP down session 1 Nov 2 14 06 tsnext farallon com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN
51. file follow these steps 1 Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located 2 Select Config File Name and enter a name for the file you will upload The file will appear with the name you choose on the TFTP server You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example Mypc Netopia myfile 3 Select Write Config Now and press Return Netopia will begin to transfer the file 4 The TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Writing Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM You can transfer configuration and firmware files with XMODEM through the Netopia R2121 s console port Be sure your terminal emulation program supports XMODEM file transfers To go to the X Modem File Transfer screen select it in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen Note The X Modem File Transfer screen is only available if you are connected via the Console port Utilities and Diagnostics 15 11 X Modem File Transfer Send Firmware to Netopia Send Config to Netopia Receive Config from Netopia Send Firmware to Netopia Internal modem Modem Firmware Status IDLE Updating firmware Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your
52. how many devices Ethernet LocalTalk EtherTalk TCP IP IPX Other How to reach us We can help you with your problem more effectively if you have completed the environment profile in the previous section If you contact us by telephone please be ready to supply Netopia Technical Support with the information you used to configure the Netopia R2121 Also please be at the site of the problem and prepared to reproduce it and to try some troubleshooting steps When you are prepared contact Netopia Customer Service by e mail telephone fax or post Internet techs ports netopia com for technical support info netopia com for general information A 4 User s Reference Guide Phone 1 800 782 6449 Fax 1 510 814 5023 Netopia Inc Customer Service 2470 Mariner Square Loop Alameda California 94501 USA Netopia Bulletin Board Service 1 510 865 1321 Online product information Product information can be found in the following Netopia World Wide Web server via http www netopia com Internet via anonymous FTP to ftp netopia com pub FAX Back This service provides technical notes which answer the most commonly asked questions and offer solutions for many common problems encountered with Netopia products FAX Back 1 510 814 5040 Setting Up Internet Services B 1 Appendix B Setting Up Internet Services This chapter describes how to obtain and set up Internet Services This section covers the following topics
53. longer appear in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was added IPX SAP filters For each IPX SAP filter you can configure a set of parameters to match on certain attributes of IPX SAP packet entries The filters check IPX SAP packets for entries that match and then act on those entries The SAP packets themselves are always allowed to continue after their entries are checked The purpose of filtering SAP packets is not to make your network more secure but to add efficiency to network bandwidth use Filtering SAP packets may reduce the size of SAP packets and SAP bindery tables by removing unwanted entries Viewing and modifying SAP filters To display a table of IPX SAP filters select Show Change IPX SAP Filters in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen To modify any of the filters in the table select the desired filter and press Return to go to the Change SAP Filter screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter screen see the next section Security 14 27 Adding a SAP filter To add a new IPX SAP filter select Add IPX SAP Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add SAP Filter screen Add Sap Filter Filter Name Server Name Socket 0000 Type 0000 IPX Network 00000000 IPX Node Address 000000000000 ADD FILTER NOW CANCEL Configure a new IPX SAP Filter Finished ADD or CANCEL to exit By default the filter s sock
54. not supplied Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov AMINO 8 16 User s Reference Guide Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 1 Chapter 9 Managing Voice and Data Calls You can set a Netopia Router to make scheduled connections using designated connection profiles This is useful for creating and controlling regularly scheduled periods when the router can be used by hosts on your network It is also useful for once only connections that you want to schedule in advance The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router can answer calls as well as initiate them To answer calls the Netopia R2121 uses a Default Answer Profile The Default Answer Profile controls how incoming calls are set up authenticated filtered and more This chapter also describes how to use the Netopia R2121 s SmartPhone feature With SmartPhone other analog devices such as telephones facsimile machines or modems can connect to the Netopia R2121 and communicate over the same lines The Netopia R2121 with SmartPhone provides m Caller ID support for call authentication m distinctive ring detection primarily for party line sharing m parallel off hook detection preventing the Netopia R2121 from initiating calls when the telephone line is otherwise busy m auxiliary telephone control allowing management of whether a downstream phone can pre empt or interfere with a Netopia R2121 data call This is also called Call Bumping and Squelch Blocking Topics in this chap
55. organization s network administration The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or the built in modems Follow these steps to update the Netopia R2121 s firmware 1 Make sure you have the firmware file on disk and know the path to its location 2 Select Send Firmware to Netopia or Send Firmware to Netopia WAN module and press Return The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the firmware file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again 15 12 User s Reference Guide The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new firmware into effect While the system resets the LEDs will blink on and off Caution Do not manually power down or reset the Netopia R2121 while it is automatically resetting or it could be damaged Downloading configuration files The Netopia R2121 can be configured by downloading a configuration file The downloade
56. strings are set to public and private respectively You should change both of the default community strings to values known only to you and trusted system adminis trators To change a community string select it and enter a new value Starting with the version 4 3 firmware setting the Read Only and Read Write community strings to the empty string will block all SNMP requests to the router The router may still send SNMP Traps if those are properly enabled Previously if either community string was the empty string SNMP Requests specifying an empty community string were accepted and processed This change is designed to allow the administrator to block SNMP access to the router and to provide more granular control over the allowed SNMP operations to the router m Setting only the Read Write community string to the empty string will block SNMP Set Requests to the router but Get Requests and Get Next Requests will still be honored using the Read Only community string assuming that is not the empty string m Setting only the Read Only community string to the empty string will not block Get Requests or Get Next Requests since those operations and Set Requests are still allowed using the non empty Read Write community string Caution Even if you decide not to use SNMP you should change the community strings This prevents unauthorized access to the Netopia R2121 through SNMP For more information on security issues
57. that are accessed through the other menu entry points The Quick View menu displays at a glance current real time operating information about your router See Quick View status overview on page 13 1 for detailed information Connecting through a Telnet session Features of the Netopia R2121 may be configured through the console screens Before you can access the console screens through Telnet you must have a network connection locally to the router or IP access to the router through the WAN port This could be the same connection as the one you used with SmartStart Note Alternatively you can have a direct serial console cable connection using the provided console cable for your platform PC or Macintosh and the Console port on the back of the router For more information on attaching the console cable see Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 Telnet software installed on the computer you will use to configure the router Console based Management 6 3 Configuring Telnet software If you are configuring your router using a Telnet session your computer must be running a Telnet software program m If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows you can use a Windows Telnet application or simply run Telnet from the Start menu m If you connect a Macintosh computer you can use the NCSA Telnet program supplied on the Netopia R2121 CD You install NCSA Telnet by simply dragging the applic
58. the next hop router is by a native AppleTalk network e g LocalTalk or EtherTalk Phase Il An IP address is displayed if the Netopia R2121 is connected to the router shown using AURP IP address means a connection transports over AURP AppleTalk encapsulated IP Monitoring Tools 13 11 Pkts Fwded The number of packets sent to the router shown Served IP Addresses You can view all of the IP addresses currently being served by the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router from the Served IP Addresses screen From the Statistics amp Logs menu select Served IP Addresses The Served IP Addresses screen appears Served IP Addresses Type Expires Client Identifier SCROLL UP DHCP 00 36 EN 00 00 c5 4a 1f ea DHCP 00 58 EN 08 00 07 16 0c 85 Lease Management EN Ethernet Address AT AppleTalk Address CP Profile Name HX You can manage DHCP leases by selecting Lease Management in this screen 13 12 User s Reference Guide The IP Address Lease Management screen appears IP Address Lease Management Reset All Leases Release BootP Leases Reclaim Declined Addresses Hit RETURN ENTER you will return to the previous screen By selecting each of these options you can m Reset all current IP addresses leased through DHCP without waiting for the default one hour lease period to elapse m Release BootP leases that may be in place and which may no longer be required m Reclaim served leases that have been declin
59. the ar SmartStart Wizard configuration utility GS Ta Sar ra isat pu earn Click the Next button after you have responded to the i E T reese a interactive prompts in each screen Wiee The Help button will display useful information to assist ta you in responding to the interactive prompts gmartStar ie oe e j 3 4 User s Reference Guide Easy or Advanced options screen You can choose either ie Easy or Advanced setup Eick fg on Ws pe m If you choose Easy SmartStart automatically uses M the preconfigured IP addressing setup built into your ne B sh lt o router This is the best choice if you are creating a be i D ddwed Mik g jrd rigar oie new network or don t already have an IP addressing anitihi paps bal beat ea scheme on your new network If you choose Easy you will see a Connection Test screen like the one shown below while SmartStart a EE checks the connection to your router m If you choose Advanced skip to page 3 8 now The SmartStart Wizard displays the Router IP Address screen on page 3 8 in which you can choose ways to modify your router s IP address Easy option Connection Test screen SmartStart tests the BEE ci Cone connection to the router While it is testing the SEENT connection a progress indicator screen is displayed and jas g the router s Ethernet LEDs flash When the test succeeds SmartStart indicates success If the test fails the wizard displays an error sc
60. to communicate with an IP computer MIB Management Information Base A standardized structure for SNMP management information modem A device used to convert digital signals from a computer into analog signals that can be transmitted across standard analog not ISDN telephone lines Modem is a contraction of modulator demodulator Glossary 5 NAT Network Address Translation A feature that allows communication between the LAN connected to the Netopia ISDN Router and the Internet using a single IP address instead of having a separate IP address for each computer on the network NetBIOS A network communications protocol used on PC LANs network A group of computer systems and other computer devices that communicate with one another network administrator A person who coordinates the design installation and management of a network A network administrator is also responsible for troubleshooting and for adding new users to the network network log A record of the names of devices location of wire pairs wall jack numbers and other information about the network network number A unique number for each network in an internet AppleTalk network numbers are assigned by seed routers to which the network is directly connected An isolated AppleTalk network does not need a network number network number remapping Resolves network number conflicts when two or more AppleTalk networks that may have duplicate network numbers are connected
61. to confirm the reset Select CONTINUE to reset the counters or CANCEL to leave them as is If you select Profile Statistics the following screen appears Call Accounting Profile Statistics in HHHH MM Easy Setup Profile Profile 02 You can view the individual usage statistics for each of the Connection Profiles you have defined Note Per profile call accounting information is accumulated even if you have not enabled call accounting in Telco Options IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 1 Chapter 10 IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation The Netopia R2121 uses Internet Protocol IP to communicate both locally and with remote networks This chapter shows you how to configure the Router to route IP traffic You also learn how to configure the Router to serve IP addresses to hosts on your local network Netopia s SmartIP features IP address serving and Network Address Translation For a detailed discussion of Network Address Translation see Appendix D Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior This chapter describes how to use the Network Address Translation feature of SmartIP Note When you configured your Netopia R2121 using SmartStart Network Address Translation was enabled by default You have the option of disabling it if you wish This is done through the System Configuration screens using Console based Management This section covers the following topics m Network Address Translation
62. topics Creating a new Connection Profile on page 8 2 System Configuration screens on page 8 8 Navigating through the System Configuration screens on page 8 8 System Configuration features on page 8 9 8 2 User s Reference Guide Creating a new Connection Profile Connection Profiles define the telephone and networking protocols necessary for the router to make a remote connection A Connection Profile is like an address book entry describing how the router is to get to a remote site or how to recognize and authenticate a remote user dialing in to the router For example to create a new Connection Profile you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select Add Connection Profile Main z WAN w Add Connection Menu Configuration Profile The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 02 Profile Enabled Yes IP Enabled IP Profile Parameters IPX Enabled Data Link Encapsulation is Data Link Options Telco Options ADD PROFILE NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Configure a new Conn Profile Finished ADD or CANCEL to exit On a Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 1 Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile It can be any name you wish For examp
63. trap receivers 1 Select Add IP Trap Receiver 2 Select Receiver IP Address or Domain Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the SNMP manager you want to receive the trap 3 Select Community String if you enabled one in the SNMP Setup screen and enter the appropriate password 4 Select Add Trap Receiver Now and press Return You can add up to seven more receivers Viewing IP trap receivers To display a view only table of IP trap receivers select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen Modifying IP trap receivers 1 To edit an IP trap receiver select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 Inthe Change IP Trap Receiver screen edit the information as needed and press Return Deleting IP trap receivers 1 To delete an IP trap receiver select Delete IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 Inthe dialog box select Continue and press Return Security 14 1 Chapter 14 Security The Netopia R2121 provides a number of security features to help protect its configuration screens and your local network from unauthorized access Although these features are optional it is strongly recommended that you use them This section covers the following topics Suggested security measures on page 14 1 lists actions for blocking potenti
64. trying to make Local routing problems m Observe the Ethernet LEDs to see if data traffic flow appears to be normal m Check the WAN Statistics and LAN Statistics screens to see more specific information on data traffic flow and address serving Troubleshooting A 3 Power outages If you suspect that power was restored after a power outage and the Netopia R2121 is connected to a remote site you may need to switch the Netopia R2121 off and then back on again After temporary power outages a connection that still seems to be up may actually be disconnected Rebooting the Router should reestablish the connection Technical support Netopia Inc is committed to providing its customers with reliable products and documentation backed by excellent technical support Before contacting Netopia Look in this guide for a solution to your problem You may find a solution in this troubleshooting appendix or in other sections Check the index for a reference to the topic of concern If you cannot find a solution complete the environment profile below before contacting technical support Environment profile m Locate the Netopia R2121 s model number product serial number and firmware version The serial number is on the bottom side of the Router along with the model number The firmware version appears in the Netopia R2121 s Main Menu screen Model number Serial number Firmware version m What kind of local network s do you have with
65. your terminal emulation program that may be interfering with your access to the port you have entered the correct password if necessary Your Netopia R2121 s console access may be password protected from a previous configuration See your system administrator to obtain the password See Appendix A Troubleshooting for more suggestions Easy Setup 7 3 Beginning Easy Setup To begin Easy Setup select Easy Setup in the Main Menu then press Return The Easy Setup Profile screen appears Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Number to Dial 12345678901234567890 Address Translation Enabled Yes Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 0 0 0 PPP Authentication PAP Send User Name Send Password PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Enter the directory number for the remote network connection Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen Easy Setup profile The Easy Setup Profile screen is where you configure the parameters that control the Netopia R2121 s connection to a specific remote destination usually an ISP or a corporate site On a Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 See Creating a new Connection Profile on page 8 2 1 Select Number to Dial and enter the telephone number you received from your ISP This is the number the Netopia R2121 dials to reach your ISP Enter
66. 0 2 which should also be the Default Gateway under IP Setup in System Configuration This is done for profile matching purposes and because the IP address of the router the Netopia R2121 is dialing is not always known As mentioned earlier in this appendix NAT works well for IP sessions originated on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface destined for the Internet without any additional configuration For incoming IP connections from the Internet to a host on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface Exported Services need to be used Exported Services are configured under IP Setup in System Configuration This is where a particular type of TCP or UDP service originating from the Internet is redirected to a host on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface An example of this screen is as follows D 8 User s Reference Guide Add Exported Service Service Local Server s IP Address ADD EXPORT NOW Within Exported Services is a pop up containing a list of well known TCP and UDP services that can be redirected to a single host on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface There is also an Other option which allows for manual configuration of additional TCP or UDP ports There can be a total of 32 Exported Services that can be defined When a particular type of service is redirected to an IP address that service is removed from the pop up list since only one type of service can be redirected to a single host However several different types
67. 1 Updating Netopia s firmware 15 8 Uploading a configuration file 15 10 uploading configuration files with TFTP 15 10 with XMODEM 15 12 user accounts 14 2 using filters 14 12 Utilities and Tests 15 1 V Viewing and modifying packet filters 14 24 Viewing and modifying SAP filter sets 14 29 Viewing IP trap receivers 13 16 Viewing scheduled connections 9 8 W WAN event history 13 6 Statistics 13 4 Index 6 WAN configuration 9 2 10 3 WAN event history 13 6 WAN statistics 134 13 5 Windows 95 SmartStart 3 3 X XMODEM 15 10 XMODEM file transfers downloading configuration files 15 12 updating firmware 15 11 uploading configuration files 15 12 Z Zone Name 13 10 Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies 1 Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies Netopia warrants to you the end user that the Netopia Router with Dual Analog the Product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from date of purchase Netopia s entire liability and your sole remedy under this warranty during the warranty period is that Netopia shall at its option either repair the Product or refund the original purchase price of the Product In order to make a claim under this warranty you must comply with the following procedure 1 Contact Netopia Customer Service within the warranty period to obtain a Return Materials Authorization RMA number 2 Return the d
68. 10 1 Using Network Address Translation cccsseeeeeee 10 3 Associating port numbers to nodes seee 10 5 Using multiple Connection Profiles 10 5 iv User s Reference Guide Network Address Translation guidelines 10 5 PS STU P E A A EE A 10 6 IP SUDRE E oscri 10 10 Statie rO S naa a E E 10 12 IP address Ser iie aiaa 10 16 DHCP NetBIOS Option S crer iiinarsannis aisian 10 18 MaclP Kip Forwarding Options ccccccsseeeees 10 21 Chapter U1 IP X SetU nirien iaaea a eian 11 1 IPX Feature aenn a E A RA 11 1 IEA DRUG anson aa 11 1 Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX csssseeeees 11 1 IPR daN asini dake tiaunetandentons 11 2 SOCKET esi a Ea A 11 2 Routing Information Protocol RIP sesiiscrsnsririssss 11 2 Service Advertising Protocol SAP 11 2 PS ics cis tacactewerdtanle tun wetontuamieccetetiseetandentes 11 3 PA S POONNE arysirna EA ARA 11 3 aS EEI EAEE 11 3 IPX in the answer profile snoiriissiirrriiiidsniiirinosa 11 5 IP PO ENN AES odana a a 11 7 Chapter 12 AppleTalk S tup ccccecccsceceeessseeeeeseeseenenseees 12 1 APIS TAIK ROWOIKS siiki snet EEE E 12 1 AppleTalk protocol isis cecaiisreiunreninieieaneien 12 1 hek EA TANET AE EAE IAT EA A E AE T 12 3 FUE E E E EE E O 12 3 Routers and S COON srcarersnrariiinarinniaas 12 3 Helling A OLEAN sarres 124 COMMCUMME AR DISTAIK rrara 1246 Ether k SEW nera 12 6 borak SENI reret 12 7 AURP SOUD sicrie 12 8 Contents v Chap
69. 10 18 11 3 NetBIOS Scope 10 19 Netopia answering calls 9 4 connecting to Ethernet rules 5 3 connecting to LocalTalk 5 6 connection profile 7 3 distributing IP addresses 10 16 C 5 IP setup 74 IPX setup 7 4 LocalTalk configuration 12 7 Index 4 monitoring 13 1 security 14 1 system utilities and tests 15 1 Network Address Translation see NAT 10 1 Network problems A 2 network status overview 13 1 Next 13 10 Next Router Address 13 10 non seeding 12 3 0 Output filter 1 14 19 overview 1 1 P packet header C 13 PAP and answer profile 9 6 Parts of a filter 14 7 password to protect security screen 14 2 user accounts 14 2 Ping 15 2 ping test configuring and initiating 15 2 Pkts Fwded 13 11 Plain Old Telephone Services see POTS 9 1 Port number comparisons 14 8 Port numbers 14 8 port numbers 14 8 POTS 9 1 Protecting the configuration screens 14 2 Protecting the Security Options screen 14 2 proxy addresses 10 1 Q Quick View 13 1 R Resetting the system 15 13 resetting the system 15 13 restricting telnet access 144 RIP 10 9 router to serve IP addresses to hosts 10 1 Routing Information Protocol RIP 11 2 routing tables AppleTalk 13 9 IP 10 12 13 9 rules of static route installation 10 15 S SAP server types 11 3 scheduled connections adding 9 9 defined 9 1 9 7 deleting 9 12 modifying 9 12 once only 9 11 viewing 9 8 weekly 9 10 screens connecting to 8 8 security filters 14 4 14 21 measure
70. 11010101 245 11110101 151 10010111 183 10110111 215 11010111 247 11110111 153 10011001 185 10111001 217 11011001 249 11111001 10011011 187 10111011 219 11011011 251 11111011 10011101 189 10111101 221 11011101 253 11111101 159 10011111 191 10111111 223 11011111 255 11111111 Further Reading F 1 Appendix F Further Reading Angell David SDN for Dummies Foster City CA IDG Books Worldwide 1995 Thorough introduction to ISDN for beginners Apple Computer Inc AppleTalk Network System Overview Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1989 Apple Computer Inc Planning and Managing AppleTalk Networks Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1991 Black U Data Networks Concepts Theory and Practice Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1989 Black U Physical Level Interfaces and Protocols Los Alamitos California IEEE Computer Society Press 1988 Black Uyless Emerging Communications Technologies Englewood Cliffs New Jersey PTR Prentice Hall 1994 Describes how emerging communications technologies including ISDN and Frame Relay operate and where they fit in a computer communications network Case J D J R Davins M S Fedor and M L Schoffstall Network Management and the Design of SNMP Connexions The Interoperability Report Vol 3 March 1989 Case J D J R Davins M S Fedor and M L Schoff
71. 121 s configuration information and remotely set its parameters using the Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP on page 13 13 Open a Telnet connection to the IP address you set in the router with SmartStart for example 192 168 1 1 The console screen will open to the Main Menu similar to the screen shown below Netopia R2121 v4 3 Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration You always start from this main screen Navigating through the System Configuration screens To help you find your way to particular screens some sections in this guide begin with a graphical path guide similar to the following example Main System Network Protocols Menu gt Configuration z Setup IP Setup This particular path guide shows how to get to the Network Protocols Setup screens The path guide represents these steps 1 Beginning in the Main Menu select the System Configuration item and press Return 2 3 WAN and System Configuration 8 9 Select the Network Protocols item in the System Configuration screen and press Return Select the IP Setup item in the Network Protocols Setup screen and press Return To go back in this sequence of screens use the Escape key System Configuration features SmartStart m
72. 98 the International Telecommunications Union is expected to ratify the unified standard thereby allowing interoperability of modems and ISPs central site equipment with appropriate firmware upgrades wall jack A small hardware component used to tap into telephone wall cable An RJ 11 wall jack usually has four pins an RJ 45 wall jack usually has eight pins WAN wide area network A network that consists of nodes connected by long distance transmission media such as telephone lines WANs can span a State a country or even the world WAN IP In addition to being a router the Netopia ISDN Router is also an IP address server There are four protocols it can use to distribute IP addresses over the WAN which include DHCP BOOTP IPCP and MaclIP WAN IP is a feature for both the Small Office and Corporate Netopia ISDN Router models wiring closet A central location where a building s telephone and network wiring is connected Multi story buildings often have a main wiring closet in the basement and satellite wiring closets on each floor zone An arbitrary subset of nodes within an AppleTalk internet Creating multiple zones makes it easier for users to locate network services The network administrator defines zones when he or she configures routers Isolated networks have no zones LocalTalk and EtherTalk Phase networks may have no more than one zone each EtherTalk Phase Il and TokenTalk networks may have more than one zone each Seve
73. ADD or CANCEL to exit By default the filter s socket numbers and network and node addresses are null all zeros This sets the filter to match on any IPX data packet You should configure the filter using criteria that meet your security needs 14 24 User s Reference Guide 1 Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter 2 To specify a source network for the filter to match on select Source Network and enter an IPX network address 3 To specify a source node for the filter to match on select Source Node Address and enter an IPX node address 4 To specify a source socket for the filter to match on select Source Socket and enter an IPX source socket number 5 To specify a destination network for the filter to match on select Destination Network and enter an IPX network address 6 To specify a destination node for the filter to match on select Destination Node Address and enter an IPX node address 7 To specify a destination socket for the filter to match on select Destination Socket and enter an IPX destination socket number 8 Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter Select CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter screen without saving the new filter Deleting a packet filter To delete a packet filter select Delete IPX Packet Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to
74. AURP accept connections only from configured partners Configure the Netopia R2121 through the serial console port to ensure that your communications cannot be intercepted 14 2 User s Reference Guide User accounts When you first set up and configure the Netopia R2121 no passwords are required to access the configuration screens Anyone could tamper with the router s configuration by simply connecting it to a console However by adding user accounts you can protect the most sensitive screens from unauthorized access User accounts are composed of name password combinations that can be given to authorized users Caution You are strongly encouraged to add protection to the configuration screens Unprotected screens could allow an unauthorized user to compromise the operation of your entire network Once user accounts are created users who attempt to access protected screens will be challenged Users who enter an incorrect name or password are returned to a screen requesting a name password combination to access the Main Menu To set up user accounts select Security in the System Configuration screen and go to the Security Options screen Security Options Enable Dial in Console Access Enable SmartStart SmartView Web Server Enable Telnet Console Access Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens Show Users Add User Delete User Password for This Screen 11 chars max Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC ca
75. C a b c 248 255 255 255 248 3 The Netopia R2121 s connection profiles for Routers B and C create entries in its IP routing table One entry points to the subnet a b c 128 while a second entry points to the subnet a b c 248 The IP routing table might look similar to the following IP Routing Table a b c 1 WAN Management 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 lp1 Local 255 255 255 192 a b c 128 WAN Local 255 255 255 248 a b c 248 WAN UPDATE Let s see how a packet from the Internet gets routed to the host with IP address a b c 249 which is served by Router C The packet first arrives at Router A which delivers it to its local network a b c 0 The packet is then received by the Netopia R2121 which examines its destination IP address The Netopia R2121 compares the packet s destination IP address with the routes in its IP routing table It begins with the route at the bottom of the list and works up until there s a match or the route to the default gateway is reached When a b c 249 is masked by the first route s subnet mask it yields a b c 248 which matches the network address in the route The Netopia R2121 uses the connection profile associated with the route to connect to Router C and then forwards the packet Router C delivers the packet to the host on its local network Understanding IP Addressing C 13 The following diagram illustrates the IP address space taken up by the two remote IP subnets You can see from
76. IP and Network Address Translation 10 21 MaclIP Kip Forwarding Options When hosts using AppleTalk typically those using LocalTalk are not directly connected to an IP network usually an Ethernet they must use a MaclIP AppleTalk1P gateway The optional Netopia AppleTalk feature enhancement kit provides for this service A MacIP gateway converts network traffic into the correct format for AppleTalk or IP depending on the traffic s destination The MaclP gateway can also distribute IP addresses to AppleTalk computers on the network Note Macintosh computers that have LocalTalk or EtherTalk selected in the MacTCP control panel or AppleTalk MacIP selected in the TCP IP control panel must use the MaclIP gateway to communicate with the Internet or any other IP network Users should point their MacTCP or TCP IP control panel to look in the LocalTalk zone for the MacIP server Macintosh computers that have Ethernet selected in the MacTCP or TCP IP control panel can do their own AppleTalk4P conversions Setting up MaclP involves choosing MacIP dynamic address serving and then configuring that type KIP forwarding is simply a method for distributing IP addresses to AppleTalk clients To go to the MacIP Setup screen select MacIP KIP Clients in the IP Address Serving screen from the System Configuration menu m Select Serve Mac IP KIP Clients and toggle to Yes to enable MaclIP KIP address serving capability This option is automati
77. ISP Implicit Search Path Enter your domain name if you do not have a Starting domain name domain name enter the domain name of your ISP Close the TCP IP control panel and save the settings These are the only fields you need to modify in these screens 3 16 User s Reference Guide Using Classic Networking MacTCP 1 2 C i Go to the Apple Menu Select Control Panels and then Network In the Network window select EtherTalk Adira me T a Dherus N Address PS a B g TEN r Tuba Mesk 54 25595 0 Lacat ni taal bk F 4 Mee ot I REAREA eae Dwi i iherativee ee LELLE ERLLLLLLL nadt Bangi A SUGTEE Soe From 7 Pi i Su bares k iir F That Dirvi Diii ra vl jairai Gabian Pihirei Moe iim eee nah r AAN nares Deain M rhe Saredr Inar HATH Eber Tak Trka 2 55 Tamah IP Adorees Defam Reus EITE pe Go back to the Apple menu Select Control Panels and then MacTCP Select EtherTalk From the pull down menu under EtherTalk select an available zone then click the More button In the MacTCP More window select the Server radio button If necessary fill in the Domain Name Server Information given to you by your administrator Restart the computer These are the only fields you need to modify in these screens Note More information about configuring your Macintosh computer for TCP IP connectivity through a Netopia R2121 can be found in Technote NIR_026 Open Transport and Netopia Routers loca
78. ISP that s not listed the software allows you to configure your internal connection by entering just five fields username password dialup number DNS and IP gateway m Support for IP and IPX routing for Internet and Intranet connectivity m P address serving over Ethernet or a WAN link which allows local or remote network nodes to automatically acquire an IP address dynamically from a designated pool of available addresses m Support for Console based management Support for remote configuration by your reseller your network administrator or technicians at Netopia Inc m Wall mountable Bookshelf Side stackable or Desktop stackable design for efficient space usage m SmartiP makes it simple and economical to connect a workgroup of users to the Internet or a remote IP 1 2 User s Reference Guide network by using Network Address Translation and a single IP address m SmartPhone allows the router to share telephone lines with analog telephones or facsimile machines saving the cost of adding separate telephone lines for these devices More than Plain Old Telephone Service POTS SmartPhone adds distinctive ringing and CallerlD capabilities m AppleTalk support available as a separate add on AppleTalk kit including a firmware feature set enhancement and custom HD 15 dual RJ 11 PhoneNET connector allows for LocalTalk to Ethernet routing assigning IP addresses to Macintosh users MaclP IP functionality for LocalTalk
79. In Out LED status Remote Address Gateway DNS DNS Alternate Connect Disconnect 4 2 User s Reference Guide Navigating SmartView You access the SmartView monitor by launching your web browser and entering the URL http router_IP_Address smartview html where router _IP_address is the address of your router Once you have invoked the SmartView pages you should bookmark SmartView in your browser for easy access SmartView uses a tabbed view to categorize information and reduce the amount of information displayed at once You click on the tabs to display the different informational categories Machine Info Connection Profiles Device Event History WAN Event History General Machine Information page In addition to the static machine information about your router such as model and firmware version SmartView displays a realtime visual representation of the Netopia R2121 s status lights LEDs This is particularly useful if the router is located out of visual range such as in a wiring closet SEE PEE amp Monitoring with SmartView 4 3 Connection Profiles page The Connection Profiles page displays the currently active Connection Profile and any alternate profiles you may have created You can switch from one Connection Profile to another by disconnecting from one and connecting to another Walangi Don PrO ferns buyn Hier DRESE shka Zim a inacina ae Da TUJ hatte ro Toa a DA Ti
80. J K Telecommunications 2nd ed Homewood Illinois Business One Irwin 1992 Hagans R Components of OSI ES4S Routing ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 3 No 8 August 1989 F 2 User s Reference Guide Hares S Components of OSI Inter Domain Routing Protocol IDRP ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 6 No 5 May 1992 Jones N E H and D Kosiur Macworld Networking Handbook San Mateo California IDG Books Worldwide Inc 1992 Joyce S T and J Q Walker Il Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN An Overview ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 6 No 10 October 1992 Kousky K Bridging the Network Gap LAN Technology Vol 6 No 1 January 1990 LaQuey Tracy The Internet Companion A Beginner s Guide to Global Networking Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1994 Leinwand A and K Fang Network Management A Practical Perspective Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1993 Levine John R and Carol Baroudi The Internet for Dummies Foster City CA IDG Books Worldwide 1993 Covers all of the most popular Internet services including e mail newsgroups and the World Wide Web Also has information on setting up individual workstations with TCP IP stacks Lippis N The Internetwork Decade Data Communications Vol 20 No 14 October 1991 McNamara J E Local Area Networks Digital Press Educational Services
81. LocalTalk adaptor cable available from Farallon division of Netopia Connect the adaptor cable s RJ 11 connector to the AppleTalk cable s PhoneNet connector Connect the cable s mini DIN 3 connector to your LocalTalk network Be sure to observe the standard rules governing maximum cable lengths and limits on the number of nodes on a PhoneNET network The dual RJ 11 PhoneNET connector allows insertion in the LocalTalk daisy chain or at the end If the device is connected at the end of the daisy chain you must install the accompanying terminator Wiring guidelines for PhoneNET cabling Connecting Your Local Area Network 5 7 22 gauge 24 gauge 26 gauge Topology 642 mm 510 mm 403 mm daisy chain n a n a 1800 ft 549 m backbone 4500 ft 3000 ft 1800 ft 1372 m 229 m 549 m 4 branch passive star 1125 ft 750 ft 450 ft 343 m 229 m 137 m LocalTalk StarController 3000 ft 2000 ft 1200 ft 12 branch active star 914 m 610m 366 m distance is per branch Note Make sure you do not connect your LocalTalk network to a Telco port or a POTS Phone 1 and 2 port For detailed configuration instructions see AppleTalk Setup on page 12 1 5 8 User s Reference Guide Part Il Advanced Configuration User s Reference Guide Console based Management 6 1 Chapter 6 Console based Management Console based management is a menu driven interface for the capabilities built in to the Netopia R2121 Console base
82. Menu Configuration Serving In addition to being a router the Netopia R2121 is also an IP address server There are four protocols it can use to distribute IP addresses The first called Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is widely supported on PC networks as well as Apple Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system Addresses assigned via DHCP are leased or allocated for a short period of time if a lease is not renewed the address becomes available for use by another computer DHCP also allows most of the IP parameters for a computer to be configured by the DHCP server simplifying setup of each machine The second called BOOTP also known as Bootstrap Protocol is the predecessor to DHCP and allows older IP hosts to obtain most of the information that a DHCP client would obtain However in contrast BOOTP address assignments are permanent since there is no lease renewal mechanism in BOOTP The third protocol called Dynamic WAN is part of the PPP MP suite of wide area protocols used for WAN connections It allows remote terminal adapters and NAT enabled routers to be assigned a temporary IP address for the duration of their connection The fourth protocol called MacIP is used only for computers on AppleTalk networks MacIP provides a protocol translation or gateway function between IP and AppleTalk as well as an IP address assignment mechanism Like DHCP
83. NETOPIA R2121 DUAL ANALOG ROUTER User s Reference Guide netopia Copyright Copyright 1998 Netopia Inc v 1298 All rights reserved Printed in the U S A This manual and any associated artwork software and product designs are copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws such materials may not be copied in whole or part without the prior written consent of Netopia Inc Under the law copying includes translation to another language or format Netopia Inc 2470 Mariner Square Loop Alameda CA 94501 1010 U S A Patents PhoneNET technology contained in Netopia is covered by U S Patent Numbers 4 901 342 and 5 003 579 Other U S and foreign patents are pending Part Number For additional copies of this electronic manual order Netopia part number 6120328 PF 02 Printed copies For printed copies of this manual order Netopia part number TER2121 Doc P N 6120328 00 02 Contents Welcome to the Netopia R2121 User s Reference Guide This guide is designed to be your single source for information about your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router It is intended to be viewed on line using the powerful features of the Adobe Acrobat Reader The information display has been deliberately designed to present the maximum information in the minimum space on your screen You can keep this document open while you perform any of the procedures described and find useful information about the procedure you a
84. P 163 176 4 32 Src IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Dst IP 200 1 1 40 Dst IP 192 168 5 2 Src Port 80 Src Port 80 Src Port 80 Dst Port 5001 Dst Port 5001 Dst Port 400 As you can see when Workstation A and Workstation B transmit an IP packet to the WWW Server on the Internet they have unique source IP addresses on the LAN interface but potentially the same source ports which in this case is 400 When the Netopia R2121 receives these packets the source IP addresses are substituted with the single globally unique IP address that was acquired on the WAN interface which is 200 1 1 40 Now both IP packets have the exact same source IP address 200 1 1 40 and source ports 400 The way the Netopia R2121 is then able to distinguish between the two IP packets is to change the source TCP or UDP ports and keep this information in an internal table As seen above the source port for Workstation A has been changed to 5001 and the source port for Workstation B has been changed to 5002 If you were to look at the internal port mapping table that is maintained by the Netopia R2121 it would look similar to the following Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior D 5 Source LAN IP Source LAN Port Remapped LAN Port 192 168 5 2 TCP 400 TCP 5001 192 168 5 3 TCP 400 TCP 5002 With this information the Netopia R2121 can determine the appropriate routing for an IP response from the Internet In this case when the WWW Server responds with a desti
85. P address range is used by all the address served clients These include DHCP BOOTP MaclIP and WAN clients even though BOOTP and static MaclP clients might not be considered served m The address range specified for address served clients cannot wrap around from the end of the total available range back to the beginning See below for a further explanation and an example m The network address issued by an ISP cannot be used as a host address A DHCP example Suppose for example that your ISP gave your network the IP address 199 1 1 32 and a 4 bit subnet mask Address 199 1 1 32 is reserved as the network address Address 199 1 1 47 is reserved as the broadcast address This leaves 14 addresses to allocate from 199 1 1 33 through 199 1 1 46 If you want to allocate a sub block of 10 addresses using DHCP enter 10 in the DHCP Setup screen s Number of Addresses to Allocate item Then in the same screen s First Address item enter the first address in the sub block to allocate such that all 10 addresses are within your original block You could enter 199 1 1 33 or 199 1 1 37 or any address between them Note that if you entered 199 1 1 42 as the first address network routing errors would probably result because you would be using a range with addresses that do not belong to your network 199 1 1 49 199 1 1 50 and 199 1 1 51 Understanding IP Addressing C 11 Nested IP subnets Under certain situations you may wish to create r
86. Router routes IPX traffic IPX setup Consult your network administrator for the IPX setup information you will need before changing any of the settings in this screen Changes made in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia R2121 is reset 11 4 User s Reference Guide To go to the IPX Setup screen from the Main Menu select System Configuration and then select Network Protocols Setup and then select IPX Setup Note If you have completed Easy Setup the information you have already entered will appear in the IP Setup options screen IPX Setup IPX Routing On Ethernet Encapsulation 802 3 Ethernet Network Address 00000000 Ethernet Path Delay 1 Ethernet NetBios Forwarding No Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set lt lt NONE gt gt Default Gateway Address 00000000 Filters and Filter Sets IPX Wan Pool Base Address 00000000 Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Set up the basic IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen 1 To enable IPX routing select IPX Routing toggle it to On and press Return 2 To change Ethernet encapsulation from the commonly used 802 3 standard select Ethernet Encapsulation and choose a different encapsulation method 3 Select Ethernet Network Address and enter the network address of the IPX network connected to the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port Note If the Ethernet network address is set to zero the Router will attempt
87. S OR AGENTS OF ANY OF THEM BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION AND THE LIKE ARISING OUT THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT EVEN IF NETOPIA OR ITS LICENSOR S HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES BECAUSE SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE WILL BE LIMITED TO 50 v 697 User s Reference Guide
88. Seeding is turned on or reset it requests network number and zone name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve For any network where no other routers reply the non sSeeding router will not have any active ports until the next reset 12 4 User s Reference Guide You should set the Netopia R2121 s seeding action to work best in your particular network environment These scenarios may guide you in deciding how to set the router s seeding If the Netopia R2121 is the only router on your network you must set it to either hard seeding or soft seeding The default is soft seeding If there is another active router on your network and you want that router to configure the Netopia R2121 s EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters you can set the Netopia R2121 to non seeding If there is another active router on your network you could set the Netopia R2121 to be soft seeding if you are unsure that the second router would always be available to configure the Netopia R2121 s EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters If you want the Netopia R2121 to configure the EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters of other routers on your network you must set it to hard seeding In this case the other routers must be soft seeding or non seeding and the Netopia R2121 must already be active when those other routers are rebooted If you want the Netopia R2121 and all other routers on your network to use only their own configurations set the Netop
89. TCP IP must be used over both networks Routers may be equipped to provide WAN line support to the LAN devices they serve They may also provide various management and monitoring functions as well as a variety of configuration capabilities router port A physical or logical connection between a router and a network Where a network only allows the use of one protocol each physical connection corresponds to one logical router port An example is the Netopia ISDN Router s LocalTalk port Where a network allows the use of several protocols each physical connection may correspond to several logical router ports one for each protocol used Each router port has its own network address routing table A list of networks maintained by each router on an internet Information in the routing table helps the router determine the next router to forward packets to seeding A method for ensuring that two or more routers agree about which physical networks correspond to which network numbers and zone names There are three options non seeding soft seeding and hard seeding Seeding can often be set separately for each router port See also hard seeding non seeding seed router and soft seeding seed router A router that provides network number and zone information to any router that starts up on the same network See also hard seeding non seeding seeding and soft seeding serial port A connector on the back of the workstation through which data fl
90. The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router has met the safety standards per UL 1950 of the Underwriters Laboratories for United States Regulatory notices Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Adequate measures include increasing the physical distance between this product and other electrical devices United States This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Requirements Part 68 The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established Rules which permit this device to be directly connecte
91. Upia Part l Getting Started User s Reference Guide Introduction 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Overview The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router is a fullfeatured stand alone multiprotocol router for connecting diverse local area networks LANs to the Internet and other remote networks The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router uses two 56Kbps modems communicating over standard analog telephone lines to provide your whole network with a high speed connection to the outside world This section covers the following topics m Features and capabilities on page 1 1 m How to use this guide on page 1 2 Features and capabilities The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router provides the following features m WAN connection over two analog phone lines using two builtin 56Kbps modems Support for a third external modem via the Auxiliary port m Support for Multilink PPP to aggregate the separate analog modems into a single virtual data pipe of 112Kbps using the builtin modems or 168Kbps by adding an external 56Kbps modem Support for Ethernet LANs m Status lights LEDs for easy monitoring and troubleshooting SmartStart Wizard software for easy configuration over an Ethernet network connection The SmartStart Wizard may include an optional automatic registration with one of several major ISPs making the process as simple as completing a registration form Using the alternate manual setting to configure the router for an
92. X XX You will receive an Upgrade Key which you should enter below Upgrade Key UPGRADE NOW Follow the instructions to enable AppleTalk on your router Once AppleTalk is enabled you can configure your network as described in the following sections 12 6 User s Reference Guide Configuring AppleTalk AppleTalk setup for Netopia R2121s consists of configuring EtherTalk LocalTalk and AURP EtherTalk Setup To go to the EtherTalk Setup options screen select Network Protocols Setup and then select AppleTalk Setup in the System Configuration screen Select EtherTalk Phase Il Setup and press Return EtherTalk Phase II Setup EtherTalk Phase II Enabled Show Zones Unnamed Enter New Zone Name Delete Zone Name Set Default Zone Net Low Net Hi Seeding Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss If you are using EtherTalk Phase Il on the Ethernet network connected to Netopia R2121 select EtherTalk Phase II Enabled and toggle it to On m To view the zones available to EtherTalk Phase Il select Show Zones and press Return You can dismiss the list of zones by pressing the Return or Escape key m Select Enter New Zone Name to enter a new zone name Note Your EtherTalk network number and zone name must match the values in use on the EtherTalk network If another router is already present on the EtherTalk network that you will be connecting to the Netopia R2121 use the zone names and networ
93. a 10Base T cable with RJ 45 connectors If you have more than eight devices to connect you can attach additional devices using either a 10Base T hub or an EtherWave daisy chain or some combination of both Connecting Your Local Area Network 5 5 m lf you add devices connected through a hub connect the hub to Ethernet port number 1 on the Netopia R2121 and set the Normal Uplink switch to Uplink When there are no more free ports on the 10Base T hub the network can be extended using EtherWave a daisy chainable Ethernet solution from Farallon Macintosh LaserWriter j AZT L__J EtherWave EtherWave ISA Card NuBus Card 10BASE EtherWave EtherWave Hub Printer Adapter Transceiver Adding a third modem You may wish to add a third external modem to gain additional speed for your Internet connection You will need to obtain the special external modem cable either from your reseller or directly from Netopia Refer to the sheet of optional feature set add ons in your Netopia R2121 documentation folio Netopia R2121 Auxiliary port for connecting a third modem Ethernet L onsole Power Ces ol oo Auxiliary conhection port HD 15 female By default the Auxiliary port on your Netopia R2121 is enabled for an external asynchronous modem This means that all you have
94. aae Wo g COLE eae Aer Conlin ie cor CAL ASIAA aceti Maacashil bia RE e a a need Been Saka hore ram Ora hta ai Ea IP erion LiT Cte LAHI ARAT AE Winar IP dekn LiT CRE A r Link Aa A ee MER Reanived Choo Corvin tor our HE aaah zj Monitoring with SmartView 4 5 Standard HTML Web based monitoring pages You can also view Connection Profile information and Event Histories in the web based monitoring pages These pages are provided for users without J ava enabled browsers Unlike the SmartView pages they are not dynamically updated You access the web based monitoring pages by launching your web browser and entering the URL http router_IP_Address where router_IP_address is the address of your router fe DE kee Go pene Goer eect ree Hee l S gt ajajaj 2 F Ooo C Netopia Router Home Page FeO ipia E bp bana iga o aaa a Tihe AMi a pai d be ookguaies iaminn drac Derin ed VERA ceermcima cove A Pino on Fage Coach reg Re Pn pph i a eh Gee te niet pega rom Pa raim Te arara Shad t rma ge coe deep on ta roir yea map u the birana On a Veksan PE ede dee ihe Sal kep sed click tha Ruled bation b Ga a hippaa Hki jaa the Chen bey saj gici the Aami bikr Por piba ac cee fe pou Hopia mH bakmak ibe pag m To view your Connection Profile information click the Connection Profiles icon m To view Event Histories click the Statistics icon m To go to SmartView if your browser is J ava enabled click the Smar
95. ab shown below Click on the DNS Configuration tab Click Enable DNS Under New gateway enter Enter the following 192 168 1 1 Click Add This is the information Netopia R2121 s pre assigned IP address Host Type the name you want to give to this computer Domain Type your domain name If you don t have a domain name type your ISP s domain name for example netopia com DNS Server Search Order Type the primary DNS IP address given to you by your ISP Click Add Repeat this process for the secondary DNS Domain Suffix Search Order Enter the same domain name you entered above 4 Click OK in this window and the next window When prompted reboot the computer Note You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network with manual or static IP addresses Be sure each computer on your network has its own IP address Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 13 Configuring TCP IP on Macintosh computers The following is a quick guide to configuring TCP IP for MacOS computers Configuring TCP IP in a Macintosh computer requires the following m You must have either Open Transport or Classic Networking MacTCP installed Note If you want to use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server built into your Netopia R2121 to assign IP addresses to your Macintoshes you must be running Open Transport standard in MacOS 8 and optional in earlier system ver
96. address should be routed Note The Default Gateway Address is usually set up to match the IPX Address in your network Connection Profile 8 To configure filters and filter sets select Filters and Filter Sets and go to the IPX filters and filter sets screens For information on how to configure IPX filters and filter sets see IPX filters on page 14 22 9 Select IPX Wan Pool Base Address and enter the first IPX network address to be allocated to requesting IPX WAN clients The base address you enter must not conflict with other IPX networks assigned to your IPX internet IPX in the answer profile The answer profile can be configured to accept calls from remote IPX networks To configure the answer profile to accept calls from remote IPX networks from the WAN Configuration menu go to the Default Answer Profile screen Default Answer Profile Main AN Menu M Configuration Note The Default Answer Profile screen varies according to configuration Default Answer Profile Calling Number Authentication Ignored Must Match a Defined Profile Yes PPP Authentication Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen To enable IPX routing in the answer profile select IPX Enabled and toggle it to Yes When IPX Enabled is set to Yes the item IPX Parameters appears below it 11 6 User s Reference Guide To configure IPX routing in the answer profile select IPX
97. al security holes User accounts beginning on page 14 2 shows you how to set up name password combinations to protect the Netopia R2121 s configuration screens Dial in Console Access on page 14 3 Telnet access on page 14 4 shows you how to control access to the Netopia R2121 by those using the Telnet protocol About filters and filter sets beginning on page 14 4 and Working with IP filters and filter sets beginning on page 14 12 have information on what filters are how they work how to customize them and how to use them in sets For information on IPX filters and filter sets see IPX filters beginning on page 14 22 Firewall tutorial on page 14 30 Token Security Authentication on page 14 37 Suggested security measures In addition to setting up user accounts Telnet access and filters all of which are covered later in this chapter there are other actions you can take to make the Netopia R2121 and your network more secure Change the SNMP community strings or passwords The default community strings are universal and could easily be known to a potential intruder Set the answer profile so it must match incoming calls to a connection profile Use CallerlD Leave the Enable Dialin Console Access option set to No Where possible insist on using PAP CHAP or secure authentication token card to authenticate connections to and from connection profiles When using
98. aling speed of a transmission medium bit A binary digit the smallest unit of data in the binary counting system A bit has a value of either 0 or 1 bits per second bps A measure of the actual data transmission rate The bps rate may be equal to or greater than the baud rate depending on the modulation technique used to encode bits into each baud interval The correct term to use when describing modem data transfer speeds bps See bits per second branch A length of cable in a star network that goes from the center of the star to a wall jack broadcast A network transaction that sends data to all hosts connected to the network Burstiness Data that uses bandwidth only sporadically that is information that does not use the total bandwidth of a circuit 100 percent of the time During pauses channels are idle and no traffic flows across them in either direction Interactive and LAN to LAN data is bursty in nature because it is sent intermittently and in between data transmission the channel experiences idle time waiting for the DTEs to respond to the transmitted data user s input of waiting for the user to send more data 2 User s Reference Guide byte A group of bits normally eight which represent one data character CallerlD See CND CCITT Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique International Consultative Committee for Telegraphy and Telephony a standards organization that devises and proposes recom
99. all of the IPC routes currently known to the Netopia R2121 To display the IPX Routing Table screen select IPX Routing Table in the Statistics amp Logs screen and press Return IPX Sap Bindery table The IPX Sap Bindery table displays all of the IPX Sap Bindery routes currently known to the Netopia R2121 To display the IPX SAP Bindery Table screen select IPX Sap Bindery Table in the Statistics amp Logs screen and press Return AppleTalk routing table The AppleTalk routing table displays information about the current state of AppleTalk networks connected to the Netopia R2121 including remote AppleTalk networks connected with AURP This information is gathered from other active AppleTalk routers 13 10 User s Reference Guide To display the AppleTalk Routing Table screen select AppleTalk Routing Table in the Statistics amp Logs screen and press Return AT Routing Table Hops State Next Rtr Addr Pkts Fwded SCROLL U t P Aspirations Sales Marketing Molluscs Customer Service Telemarketing Rio Regiment Rhinos Unique Services Aspirations Rhinos PRPNUNNNNNNNNNNN UPDATE Entries have multiple zone names Return Enter on these to see zone list Each row in the AppleTalk routing table corresponds to an AppleTalk route or network range If the list of routes shown exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items To scroll up select the SCROLL UP i
100. an have a negative impact on performance Processing of packets will take longer if they have to go through many checkpoints m Too much reliance on packet filters can cause too little reliance on other security methods Filter sets are not a substitute for password protection effective safeguarding of passwords caller ID the must match option in the answer profile PAP or CHAP in connection profiles callback and general awareness of how your network may be vulnerable An approach to using filters The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized access to the network without compromising authorized access Using filter sets is part of reaching that goal Each filter set you design will be based on one of the following approaches m That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted m That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited It is strongly recommended that you take the latter and safer approach to all of your filter set designs Working with IP filters and filter sets This section covers IP filters and filter sets For working with IPX filters and filter sets see IPX filters on page 14 22 Main System Filter Menu Configuration P Sets IP Filter Sets To work with filters and filter sets begin by accessing the filter set screens Note Make sure you understand how filters work before attempting to use them Read the section About filte
101. an use the information in the AppleTalk routing table to observe and diagnose the Netopia R2121 s current connections to other AppleTalk routers To go to the AT Routing Table screen from the Netopia R2121 s console select Statistics amp Logs from the Main Menu and then select AppleTalk Routing Table AT Routing Table ate Next Rtr Addr Pkts Fwded Hops st SCROLL UP Aspirations Sales Marketing Molluscs Customer Service Telemarketing Rio Regiment Rhinos Unique Services Aspirations PRNUNNNNNNNNNNN UPDATE Entries have multiple zone names Return Enter on these to see zone list A router has multiple communications ports and is capable of forwarding information to other routers and devices on the internet The router performs packet forwarding network and device address maintenance and other administrative functions required by the AppleTalk protocols AppleTalk Setup 12 3 MaclP When Macintosh computers encapsulate TCP IP packets in AppleTalk either because they are on LocalTalk or they are on EtherTalk for administrative reasons they must use the services of a MaclP gateway This gateway converts network traffic into the correct format for AppleTalk or IP depending on the traffic s destination Setting up MacIP involves enabling the feature and optionally setting up a range of addresses to be static See Chapter 10 IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation for more information on how to
102. and promotions for Netopia customers If your area has more than one ISP the following considerations may help you decide which ISP is best suited for your requirements Use an ISP that provides Internet access through a V 90 or K56flex line and supports dual analog LAN connections using Multilink PPP If you would like to use an ISP that you already have a relationship with but is not familiar with the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router or using Multilink PPP with analog modems call us at 1 800 NETOPIA Our representative can call your ISP and introduce them to the product As necessary we can provide them with the technical background they need to support the product See About 56K Line Access on page H 1 for more information on 56K modem connections B 2 User s Reference Guide Unique requirements Make sure the ISP can meet any unique requirements you may have Potential requirements include m Dynamic or static IP addressing m Class C IP address m Custom domain name Multiple email addresses m Web site hosting m Call back for web site hosting at your site Pricing and support Compare pricing service and technical support service among various ISPs ISP s Point of presence Check with your ISP for the location of their nearest point of presence POP in reference to your site In some instances the ISP that you choose may not offer a POP in your local area If that is the case you may incur additional fees for lo
103. anels and double click the Network icon From the Network components list select the Configuration tab 2 Select TCP IP gt Your Network Card Then select Properties In the TCP IP Properties screen shown below select the IP Address tab Click Obtain an IP Address automatically 3 Click on the DNS Configuration tab Click Disable DNS DNS will be assigned by the router with DHCP 4 Click OK in this window and the next window When prompted reboot the computer Note You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network to accept IP addresses served by the Netopia R2121 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 11 Static configuration optional If you are manually configuring for a fixed or static IP address perform the following 1 Go to Start Menu Settings Control Panels and double click the Network icon From the Network components list select the Configuration tab Select TCP IP gt Your Network Card Then select Properties In the TCP IP Properties screen shown below select the IP Address tab Click Specify an IP Address Enter the following IP Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 This address is an example of one that can be used to configure the router with the Easy option in the SmartStart Wizard Your ISP or network administrator may ask you to use a different IP address and subnet mask i Core cl Peal 3 Click on the Gateway t
104. are a single assigned network number Subnet masks are often written in decimal notation like IP addresses but they are most easily understood in binary notation When a subnet mask is written in binary notation each numeral 1 indicates that the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network or subnet address Each 0 indicates that the corresponding bit is part of the host address The following table shows the proper subnet masks to use for each class of network when no subnets are required Class Subnet mask for a network with no subnets A Binary 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 0 0 0 B Binary 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 255 0 0 C Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Decimal 255 255 255 0 To know whether subnets are being used or not you must know what subnet mask is being used you cannot determine this information simply from an IP address Subnet mask information is configured as part of the process of setting up IP routers and gateways such as the Netopia R2121 Note If you receive a routed account from an ISP there must be a mask associated with your network IP address By using the IP address with the mask you can discover exactly how many IP host addresses you actually have To configure subnets properly you must also be able to convert between binary notation and decimal notation Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet When set
105. articular deleting a subnet configured on this screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool if any on the IP Address Pools screen 10 12 User s Reference Guide If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets the IP Setup screen changes slightly IP Setup Subnet Configuration Default IP Gateway 192 128 117 163 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP v2 multicast Static Routes Address Serving Setup Exported Services Filter Sets The IP address and Subnet mask items are hidden and the Define Additional Subnets item becomes Subnet Configuration If you select Subnet Configuration you will return to the IP Subnets screen that allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional Ethernet IP subnets m Select Static Routes to manually configure IP routes See the following section Static routes Static routes are IP routes that are maintained manually Each static route acts as a pointer that tells the Netopia R2121 how to reach a particular network However static routes are used only if they appear in the IP routing table which contains all of the routes used by the Netopia R2121 see IP routing table on page 13 9 Static routes are helpful in situations where a route to a network must be used and other means of finding the route are unavailable For example static routes are
106. assed Example 4 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 104 IP Address Binary Representation 200 1 1 104 01101000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND 01100000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2121 is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule DOES match and this packet will NOT be passed Example 5 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 255 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 96 IP Address Binary Representation 200 1 1 96 01100000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 255 11111111 Perform the logical AND 01100000 Logical AND result Security 14 37 Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2121 is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule DOES match and this packet will NOT be passed This rule masks off a SINGLE IP address Token Security Authentication This section discusses how to configure and use security authentication on the Netopia R2121 Note The security authentication feature
107. assigned to any Phase II EtherTalk node that hasn t chosen a zone The user may choose another zone by opening the Network Control Panel selecting the correct physical connection and then choosing a zone in the scrolling field displayed DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A service that lets clients on a LAN request configuration information such as IP host addresses from a server Glossary 3 DNS Domain Name Service A TCP IP protocol for discovering and maintaining network resource information distributed among different servers download The process of transferring a file from a server to a client EIA Electronic Industry Association A North American standards association Ethernet A networking protocol that defines a type of LAN characterized by a 10 Mbps megabits per second data rate Ethernet is used in many mainframe PC and UNIX networks as well as for EtherTalk Ethernet address Sometimes referred to as a hardware address A 48 bits long number assigned to every Ethernet hardware device Ethernet addresses are usually expressed as 12 character hexadecimal numbers where each hexadecimal character 0 through F represents four binary bits Do not confuse the Ethernet address of a device with its network address EtherTalk Apple s data link software that allows an AppleTalk network to be connected by Ethernet cables EtherTalk is a protocol within the AppleTalk protocol set Two versions of EtherTalk are in com
108. at is already defined in the DHCP pool of addresses m In order to work correctly you must define a host or node address in the IP Profile Parameters of the Connection Profile This is accomplished by specifying the IP address that is to be statically served via the WAN and then by entering a mask value of 255 255 255 255 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses Before you allocate IP addresses using DHCP and MacIP consider whether you need to set aside any static addresses Note any planned and currently used static addresses before you use DHCP and MacIP Avoid fragmenting your block of IP addresses For example try to use a continuous range for the static addresses you choose C 10 User s Reference Guide a 1 Distributed to the Netopia R2121 Ethernet IP address 3 4 5 2 many distributed static 6 i LY 7 Oef 8 9 fo 10 11 12 13 14 7 15 16 9 Pool of Addresses Distributed 10 by MaclP and DHCP 11 12 Block of IP host addresses T derived from network IP address mask issued by ISP T The figure above shows an example of a block of IP addresses being distributed correctly The example follows these rules m An IP address must not be used as a static address if itis also in a range of addresses being distributed by DHCP or MaclP m Asingle I
109. ated calls Required Authentication is attempted if the calling number is available If authentication fails or the calling number is not available the Netopia Router disconnects the caller Use this setting if you require all calls to be CNA authenticated Calling Number Authentication CNA is an application of CallerlD It is a method of verifying that an incoming call is originating from an expected site Using CNA you can increase the security of your network by requiring that callers not only possess the correct PPP authentication information but also are calling from a particular physical location 9 6 User s Reference Guide CNA works by checking the calling number that the Netopia Router receives during the initial setup phase of an incoming call against a set of stored numbers Each number in the stored set is defined in a specific connection profile When a match occurs the incoming call is handled by the connection profile containing the matched number Using CNA can also provide cost savings because calls are not billed during the CNA phase With CNA a caller can set up a connection to the Netopia Router without incurring any charges by accessing a dial back connection profile If the caller s rates are higher than those charged to the Netopia Router s return call then using CNA has saved the difference CNA should be available where CallerlID services are available You will need to consult with your telephone service p
110. ation files on page 15 12 This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with identical parameters or for creating configuration backup files Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Netopia R2121 by Netopia or your network administrator The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or the built in modems To upload a configuration file Utilities and Diagnostics 15 13 1 Decide on a name for the file and a path for saving it 2 Select Receive Config from Netopia and press Return The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to save your current Netopia configuration If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without uploading the file or select CONTINUE to upload the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the configuration file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again Restarting the system You can restart the system by selecting the Restart System item in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen You must restart the system whenever you reconfigure the N
111. ation from the CD to your hard disk Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router You can perform all of the System Configuration activities for your Netopia R2121 through a local serial console connection using terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal provided with Windows95 on the PC or ZTerm included on the Netopia CD for the Macintosh The Netopia R2121 back panel has a connector labeled Console for attaching the Router to either a PC or Macintosh computer via the serial port on the computer On a Macintosh the serial port is called the Modem port or the Printer port This connection lets you use the computer to configure and monitor the Netopia R2121 via the console screens Ethernet Airy Power Ed Console connection port DE 9 male To connect the Netopia R2121 to your computer for serial console communication use the supplied dual console cable connector end appropriate to your platform m one DE 9 connector end attaches to a PC m the mini DIN8 connector end attaches to a Macintosh m the DE 9 end of the Console cable attaches to the Netopia R2121 s Console port If you are configuring your router via a terminal session your computer must be running a standard terminal emulation or communications software program such as those used with modems m If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows 95 or NT you can use the HyperTerminal application bund
112. ay be all you need to configure your Netopia R2121 Some users however require advanced settings or prefer manual control over the default selections that SmartStart automatically chooses For these users the Netopia R2121 provides System Configuration options To help you determine whether you need to use the System Configuration options review the following requirements If you have one or more of these needs use the System Configuration options described in the later chapters Two or more outgoing connection profiles to connect to more than one remote location for example to connect to the Internet and to a network at another office System Configuration of dynamic IP address distribution through DHCP MaclP or BootP Customized incoming call profile to control received calls Scheduled connections Greater network security through the use of filters CallerlD callback and SecurlD System Configuration of AppleTalk LAN settings System Configuration of connections to AppleTalk networks through the Internet or any IP network using AURP AppleTalk tunneling System Configuration of connection profiles See the table below for a partial list of the options available through System Configuration Layer Category Parameter Type Options Default settings Protocol Layer IP Parameters Filter Sets Basic Firewall NetBIOS Filter Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP Off IPX Parameters Path Delay 1 second NetBios Pack
113. cally enabled if the AppleTalk kit is installed and IP Address Serving is enabled m Select MaclP KIP Static Options and press Return The MaclP KIP Forwarding Setup screen tells the Netopia R2121 how many static addresses to allocate for MacIP KIP clients The addresses must fall within the address pool from the previous screen You will need to enter the number of static MaclP addresses to reserve in this screen Note that the address pool IP range will also be listed for your referral in this screen MacIP KIP Forwarding Setup This screen tells the Netopia how many static addresses to allocate for MacIP KIP clients The addresses must fall within one of the address pools from the previous screen Number of Static Addresses First Static Client Address Enter the number of static MacIP addresses to reserve here Reserve static MacIP addresses for KIP Forwarding here You have finished your IP Setup 10 22 User s Reference Guide IPX Setup 11 1 Chapter 11 IPX Setup Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX is the network protocol used by Novell NetWare networks This chapter shows you how to configure the Netopia R2121 for routing data using IPX You also learn how to configure the router to serve IPX network addresses This section covers the following topics m IPX Features on page 11 1 m IPX Definitions on page 11 1 m IPX routing tables on page 11 7 IPX Features The Netopia R2121 supports the f
114. can be explained Every IP packet that is transmitted across the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface or across the WAN interface to the Internet contains several bits of information that indicate to any device where the packet is going and where it came from In particular you have the source and destination port and source and destination IP addresses A port is used within IP to define a particular type of service and could be either a Transmission Control Protocol TCP port or User Datagram Protocol UDP port Both TCP and UDP are protocols that use IP as the underlying transport mechanism The major difference between TCP and UDP is that TCP is a reliable delivery service whereas UDP is a best effort delivery service A list of well known TCP or UDP ports and services can be found in RFC 1700 If Workstation A wants to communicate with a World Wide Web WWW Server on the Internet and the Netopia R2121 does not have NAT enabled Workstation A forms an IP packet with the source IP address of 192 168 5 2 and destination IP address of 163 176 4 32 The source port could be 400 while the destination port would be 80 WWW server The Netopia R2121 then looks at this IP packet determines the best routing method and sends that packet on its way across the WAN interface to the WWW Server on the Internet With NAT enabled the Netopia R2121 does something different For example suppose that Workstation A again wants to communicate with the WWW Server o
115. ccept incoming dial up connections you should use the following configuration method m To create one or more dial in Connection Profiles for each dial in user see Creating a new Connection Profile on page 8 2 You do this using console based management For instructions on using console based management see Console based Management on page 6 1 For instructions on creating a Connection Profile to dial out to an ISP or corporate site see Easy Setup on page 7 1 netUpia 5 Configured for two onboard and one external modem on the Auxiliary port To configure the Netopia R2121 to use the two onboard modems and a third external modem on the Auxiliary serial port you should use the following configuration options This might be done to allow three separate simultaneous dial in dial out connections or one or two aggregated dial in dial out calls using Multilink PPP m Install the special optional modem cable available from your reseller or directly from Netopia m use the SmartStart Wizard to configure your outbound connection to an ISP For instructions on this option see Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard on page 3 3 m manual configuration using console based management You simply attach your modem using the special modem cable and enter the telephone number and modem init string in your WAN configuration For instructions on this option see Adding a third modem on net
116. ch of the information required for the connection and these fields will appear grayed out When you have done this click Next The Name and Password screen on page 3 6 appears this is where you enter the username and password for your connection to your ISP Name and Password screen Enter the username and password that identifies you to your ISP Your name and password can be up to 32 characters each Note Some automated profiles already specify name and password for you in this case the screen is filled out for you and automatically skipped When you have done this click Next The SmartStart Wizard then posts your connection profile information to your router Now the Connection Profile Test screen shown below appears It allows you to test your connection to your ISP using the connection profile you have just created 5 irere m Fe rie Te cabai fe bolbe cawdd pais a Ba arne bki Fear iret E Ki aat T PL FFF ishani Por E r ae i ee i n me Ce j Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 7 Connection Profile Test screen SmartStart tests your eras connection profile by attempting to connect to your ISP im So eae ee To test the connection profile with your ISP click Next iP saint F Hi i a coerce beni ol Fi pale While the testis running SmartStart reports its progress E in a brief succession of dialog boxes as described below Available Line Test Progr
117. configuration screens 8 8 Index 2 connection profiles defined 7 3 scheduling 9 1 9 7 console configuring 8 12 screens connecting to 8 8 Console Configuration 8 12 Console connection problems A 2 console based management configuring with 6 1 7 1 8 1 D D Port 14 10 date and time setting 8 11 deciding on an ISP account B 2 default terminal emulation software settings 6 4 Delete Static Route 10 15 Deleting a packet filter 14 24 Deleting filters 14 17 Deleting IP trap receivers 13 16 designing a new filter set 14 11 DHCP defined C 8 DHCP NetBIOS Options 10 18 Disadvantages of filters 14 12 display a filter set 14 9 distributing IP addresses C 5 Downloading a configuration file 15 9 downloading a configuration file 15 9 Downloading configuration files 15 12 downloading configuration files with TFTP 15 9 with XMODEM 15 12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 10 16 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP Dynamic WAN 10 16 E Easy Setup connection profile 7 3 IP setup 74 IPX setup 7 4 navigating 6 4 overview 7 1 Enabling CNA 9 6 Ethernet 5 2 EtherTalk 5 2 event history device 13 7 WAN 134 Exported Services 10 7 F features 1 1 Filter priority 14 5 filter sets adding 14 13 defined 14 4 deleting 14 18 disadvantages 14 12 modifying 14 18 sample Basic Firewall 14 18 using 14 12 viewing 14 17 Filtering example 1 14 10 filters actions a filter can take 14 7 adding to a filter s
118. ct an account from the list and press Return to delete it To exit the list without deleting the selected account press the Escape key Dial in Console Access Remote modem terminal emulator setups can dial in to either internal modem line and establish a remote console session even though they are not using PPP This allows Netopia Inc s Up and Running Guaranteed department or other administrator with the appropriate security to remotely configure your router for you If you used SmartStart to configure your router this option will be set to No m To prevent any remote caller from establishing a remote session leave the option Enable Dial in Console Access set to No m To allow access for Up and Running Guaranteed with the default name and password in place toggle this option to Yes 14 4 User s Reference Guide Enable SmartStart SmartView Web Server You may wish to restrict access to the web based screens to prevent inadvertent switching or connecting and disconnecting of Connection Profiles Since SmartStart can be used to reconfigure the router you may wish to block inadvertent damage resulting from unauthorized use of SmartStart To prevent access to these features toggle this option to No Telnet access Telnet is a TCP IP service that allows remote terminals to access hosts on an IP network The Netopia R2121 supports Telnet access to its configuration screens Caution You should consi
119. ctions Display Change Scheduled Connection Add Scheduled Connection Delete Scheduled Connection Navigate from here to add modify change delete Scheduled Connections Viewing scheduled connections To display a table of view only scheduled connections select Display Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen Each scheduled connection occupies one row of the table Scheduled Connections mtWtfss 08 30PM 06 00 weekly Profile 01 The first column in the table shows a one letter representation of the Days of the week from Monday M or m to Sunday S ors If a letter representing a day is capitalized the connection will be activated on that day a lower case letter means that the connection will not be activated on that day If the scheduled connection is configured for a once only connection the word once will appear instead of the days of the week Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 9 The other columns show The time of day that the connection will Begin At The duration of the connection HH MM Whether it s a recurring Weekly connection or used Once Only Which connection profile Conn Prof is used to connect Whether the scheduled connection is currently Enabled The router checks the date and time set in scheduled connections against the system date and time Adding a scheduled connection To add a new scheduled connection select Add Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connec
120. ctions active in the router The Netopia R2121 does release the DHCP address back to the available DHCP address pool precisely C 8 User s Reference Guide one hour after the last heard lease request as some other DHCP implementations may hold on to the lease for an additional time after the lease expired to act as a buffer for variances in clocks between the client and server MaclIP Serving Macintosh Workstation MacTCP or Open Transport Once the Mac workstation requests and receives a valid address the Netopia R2121 will actively check for the workstation s existence once every minute m Fora DYNAMIC address the Netopia R2121 will release the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 2 minutes m Fora STATIC address the Netopia R2121 will release the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 20 minutes Netopia R2121 MaclIP Server Characteristics The Mac workstation uses ATP to both request and receive an address from the Netopia R2121 s MacIP server Once acquired NBP confirm packets will be sent out every minute from the Netopia R2121 to the Mac workstation Manually distributing IP addresses If you choose to manually distribute IP addresses you must enter each computer s address into its TCP IP stack software Once you manually issue an address to a computer it possesses that address until you manually remove it Tha
121. cy for telecommunications Successor to CCITT K56flex A modem data transmission technology standard created by Lucent Technologies and Rockwell International Its purpose is to take advantage of the largely digital portions of the telephone system in order to exceed the theoretical speed limitations of data transmission over analog telephone lines A competing technology called x2 created by U S Robotics 3Com performs a similar function In February 1998 the interested parties agreed on a unified standard called V 90 also known as V PCM which merges the K56flex standard with the competing x2 standard In September 1998 the International Telecommunications Union is expected to ratify the unified standard thereby allowing interoperability of modems and ISPs central site equipment with appropriate firmware upgrades LAN Local Area Network A privately owned network that offers high speed communications channels to connect information processing equipment in a limited geographic area LocalTalk The cabling specification for AppleTalk running at a speed of 230 4 kbps kilobits per second MaclIP A protocol in which IP packets are encapsulated within AppleTalk headers for transmission over AppleTalk networks MacIP requires the presence of at least one AppleTalk IP gateway MacIP is usually used to allow an AppleTalk computer to communicate with an IP computer MaclP client A Macintosh computer that is using the MaclP protocol
122. d cord with a mini DIN8 connector m An RJ45 Ethernet cable m Two standard RJ 11 telephone cables m A dual DE 9 and mini DIN8 to DE 9 console cable for a PC or a Macintosh m The Netopia CD containing the SmartStart Wizard an Internet browser Adobe Acrobat Reader for 2 2 User s Reference Guide Windows and Macintosh ZTerm terminal emulator software and NCSA Telnet 2 6 for Macintosh You will need m A Windows 95 based PC or a Macintosh with Ethernet connectivity for configuring the Netopia R2121 This may be built in Ethernet or an add on card with TCP IP installed and configured See Before running SmartStart on page 3 1 m Two telephone lines each with its own jack or a single jack wired for two phone lines Identify the connectors and attach the cables Identify the connectors and switches on the back panel and attach the necessary Netopia Router cables POTS Ports ppp eE Ararat pprap toT EETEEN PLETED 1 Connect the mini DIN8 connector from the Power Adapter to the Power port and plug the other end into an electrical outlet 2 Connect one end of one of the RJ 11 cables to the Telco 1 port and the other end to one of your wall outlets Making the Physical Connections 2 3 If you have two phone lines on a single wall outlet this is the only Telco connection you need to make The pinout configuration for the lines on the Telco 1 port is shown in the following diagram Telco
123. d file reconfigures all of the Router s parameters Configuration files are available from a site maintained by your organization s network administrator or from your local site see Uploading configuration files below Follow these steps to download a configuration file 1 Make sure you have the configuration file on disk and know the path to its location 2 Select Send Config to Netopia and press Return The following dialog box appears Do you want to send a saved configuration to your Netopia If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the configuration file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new configuration into effect Uploading configuration files A file containing a snapshot of the Netopia R2121 s current configuration can be uploaded from the Router to disk The file can then be downloaded by a different Netopia R2121 to configure its parameters see Downloading configur
124. d management provides access to a wide variety of features that the router supports You can customize these features for your individual setup This chapter describes how to access and navigate the console based management screens This section covers the following topics m Connecting through a Telnet session on page 6 2 m Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 m Navigating through the console screens on page 6 4 Console based management screens contain seven entry points to the Netopia Router configuration and monitoring features The entry points are displayed in the Main Menu shown below Netopia R2121 v4 3 Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick View You always start from this main screen m The Easy Setup menus display and permit changing the values contained in the default Connection Profile you created when you ran the SmartStart Wizard for initial configuration Experienced users can also use Easy Setup to initially configure the router directly through a console session without using SmartStart Easy Setup menus contain up to five descendant screens for viewing or altering these values The number of screens depends on whether you have optional features installed m The WAN Configuration menu displays and permits changing your Connection Profile s creating or deleting add
125. d over Ethernet Once the Netopia R2121 is properly configured and connected to your LAN PC and Macintosh computers that have their required components in place will be able to connect to the Internet or other remote IP networks Connecting to an Ethernet network The Netopia R2121 supports Ethernet connections through its eight Ethernet ports The Router automatically detects which Ethernet port is in use You can connect either 10Base T or EtherWave Ethernet networks to the Netopia R2121 The following table Connecting Your Local Area Network 5 3 displays some important attributes of these types of Ethernet Attribute EtherWave 10Base T Max length of backbone branch or end to end cable 330 feet 100 meters 330 feet 100 meters chained length Twisted pair Twisted pair Cable type 10Base T 10Base T Netopia R2121 port used Ethernet Ethernet Maximum 8 No dais Other restrictions devices daisy chain y 5 4 User s Reference Guide 10Base T You can connect a standard 10Base T Ethernet network to the Netopia R2121 using any of its available Ethernet ports Netopia R2121 back panel Ethernet Auxiliary onsole Power Normal Uplink om Ei eai The Netopia R2121 in a 10Base T network Ethernet Led Ed Ed EA a To connect your 10Base T network to the Netopia R2121 through an Ethernet port use
126. d share the connection The SmartStart Wizard walks you through a series of questions and based on your responses automatically configures the router for connecting your LAN to the Internet or to your remote corporate network The SmartStart Wizard will m automatically check your Windows 95 98 or NT PC s TCP IP configuration to be sure you can accept a dynamically assigned IP address and change it for you if it is not set for dynamic addressing m check the physical connection from your computer to your router without your having to enter an IP address m assign an IP address to your router allow you to register with a new ISP if you don t already have one for analog modem and ISDN models Fora list of ISPs that support Netopia Routers in North America see the Netopia website at http www netopia com m for analog modem or ISDN models allow you to enter your dial up telephone numbers and other information dial up and test your connection to your chosen ISP or other remote site Before running SmartStart Be sure you have connected the cables and power source as described in Step 1 Connect the Router guide contained in your Netopia folio Before you launch the SmartStart application make sure your computer meets the following requirements PC Macintosh ystem indows 95 98 or NT operating system acOS 7 5 or later software Connectivity TCP IP must be installed and properly MacTCP or Open Transpo
127. d to the telephone network Standardized jacks are used for these connections This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin phones G 4 User s Reference Guide If this device is malfunctioning it may also be causing harm to the telephone network this device should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made If this is not done the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures if such changes affect the compatibility or use of this device the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines inform them of a The telephone number to which this unit is connected b The ringer equivalence number c The USOC jack required RJ 11C d The FCC Registration Number 14 digits provided by FCC Items b and d are indicated on the label The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line In most areas the sum of the REN s of all devices on any one line should not exceed five 5 0 If too many devices are attached they many not ring properly Service Requirements In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs should be performed by our Company
128. der Selection screen Select an ISP from the list of Netopia ISP partners who have provided information for automatic setup Choose Generic ISP if your ISP is not included on the list If you don t already have an account with the selected ISP call and order service using the listed customer service telephone number When you have done this click Next m Most ISPs will provide you with information for you to enter in the Connection Profile screen on page 3 6 over the phone using the toll free phone number shown in the scrolling list Generally they will provide you 3 6 User s Reference Guide with m Your dial up number sometimes referred to as an ISP POP number m Your Login name and Password These are case sensitive Note Your ISP may provide you with additional values such as Remote IP Gateway or Subnet Mask These entries are not required for the SmartStart Wizard to configure your router If you have a PBX or Centrex phone system you may need a dialing prefix such as 9 for an outside line You will enter that information in the Connection Profile screen shown below Connection Profile screen Enter your ISP supplied configuration information mentioned above All fields must be filled in except the Alternate DNS field if your ISP does not provide one If your ISP appeared in the Internet Service Provider Selection screen on page 3 5 your ISP will already have provided mu
129. der password protecting or restricting Telnet access to the Netopia R2121 if you suspect there is a chance of tampering To password protect the configuration screens select Easy Setup from the Main Menu and go to the Easy Setup Security Configuration screen By entering a Name and Password pair in this screen all access via serial Telnet SNMP and web server will be password protected To restrict Telnet access select Security in the Advanced Configuration Menu and go to the Security Options screen There are two levels of Telnet restriction available To restrict Telnet access to the SNMP screens select Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens and toggle it to No See SNMP traps on page 13 15 To restrict Telnet access to all of the configuration screens select Enable Telnet Console Access and toggle it to No About filters and filter sets Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network connected to the Internet Using packet filters to control network communications can greatly improve your network s security The Netopia R2121 s packet filters are designed to provide security for the Internet connections made to and from your network You can customize the router s filter sets for a variety of packet filtering applications Typically you use filters to selectively admit or refuse TCP IP connections from certain remote networks and specific hosts You will also use filters to screen particular types of con
130. dress serving pool The Netopia R2121 does not allow an invalid address to be served Use this option ss ee ee with caution When you have done this click Next SmartStart forces the new IP address into the router tests the connection and then resets the router SmartStart then returns you to the Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen on page 3 5 Sharing the Connection Configuring TCP IP on Windows 95 98 or NT computers Configuring TCP IP on a Windows computer requires the following m An Ethernet card also known as a network adapter m The TCP IP protocol must be bound to the adapter or card 3 10 User s Reference Guide Dynamic configuration recommended If you configure your Netopia R2121 using SmartStart you can accept the dynamic IP address assigned by your router The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server which enables dynamic addressing is enabled by default in the router If your PC is not set for dynamic addressing SmartStart will offer to do this for you when you launch it In that case you will have to restart your PC and relaunch SmartStart If you configure your PC for dynamic addressing in advance SmartStart need only be launched once To configure your PC for dynamic addressing do the following F mm aine beste Play arei Pay PA Pht oP avin ave Diaki mi as orks Bore seal T mipan rehas amiane wal aF raame 1 Go to the Start Menu Settings Control P
131. dures hard seeding soft seeding and non seeding Hard seeding When a router that uses hard seeding is turned on or reset it requests network number and zone name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve If no other routers reply the router uses the network numbers and zone names specified in its own configuration If other routers reply and their information matches the router s own configuration information the result is the same the router uses the values in its own configuration However if other routers provide network numbers or zone names that conflict with those in the router s configuration the router disables any of its own ports for which there are conflicts Soft seeding When a router that uses soft seeding is turned on or reset it requests network number and zone name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve If no other routers reply the router uses the network numbers and zone names specified in its own configuration If other routers reply the router uses the information they provide regardless of whether or not there are conflicts between the information received and its configured information Once a soft or hard seeding router begins to route it can serve as a seed router providing network number and zone name information to other routers upon request The default state of the Netopia R2121 s AppleTalk ports is soft seeding Non seeding When a router using non
132. e is in use for a POTS call State Lists the ports in use for this connection Use Indicates the average percent utilization of the maximum capacity of the channels in use for the connection Remote Address Shows the IP address of the connected remote router if the connection is using IP Otherwise shows the IPX address of the connected remote router if using IPX If the directory number was entered in the WAN configuration see Specifying telephone connections on page 9 2 it shows the called directory number if locally originated otherwise the calling directory number if available Est Indicates whether the connection was locally Lcl or remotely Rmt established More Info Indicates in order of priority the NAT address in use for this connection the IPX address in use if IP is also in use or the ISDN caller identification if available Status lights This section shows the current real time status of the Netopia R2121 s status lights LEDs It is useful for remotely monitoring the router s status The Quick View screen s arrangement of LEDs corresponds to the physical arrangement of LEDs on the router LED Status PWR MODEM1 CON AUX MODEM2 EN RNG DCD TX RX LNK LNK RNG DCD TX RX DATA Each LED representation can report one of four states Adash means the LED is off R The letter R means the LED is red G The letter G means the LED is gree
133. e Netopia R2121 as an address server is that it will only distribute addresses to hosts that need to use them All Netopia R2121s come with an integrated Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP server Some routers also come with a Macintosh Internet Protocol MaclIP server These servers provide a means of distributing IP addresses to either a Mac or PC workstation as needed When setting up the DHCP or MacIP servers in the Netopia R2121 it is necessary to understand how workstations lease renew and release their IP addresses This information will be helpful in determining dynamic address allocation for a network The term lease describes the action of a workstation requesting and using an IP address The address is dynamic and can be returned to the address pool at a later time The term renew refers to what the workstations do to keep their leased IP address At certain intervals the workstation talks to the DHCP or MaclP server and renews the lease on that IP address This renewal allows the workstation to keep and use the assigned IP address until the next renewal period The term release refers to a situation where the workstation is no longer using its assigned IP address or has been shut down IP addresses can be manually released as well The IP address goes back into the DHCP or MaclP address pool to be reassigned to another workstation as needed Technical note on subnet masking Note The IP address supplied by th
134. e Netopia R2121 will be a unique number You may wish to replace this number with a number that your ISP supplies if you are configuring the router for a static IP address The automatic IP mask supplied by SmartStart is a Class C address However the Netopia R2121 and all devices on the same local network must have the same subnet mask If you require a different class address you may edit the IP Mask field to enter the correct address Refer to the table below Number of Devices other than Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet Netopia R2121 on Local Network Mask 1 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 224 Understanding IP Addressing C 7 Number of Devices other than Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet Netopia R2121 on Local Network Mask 30 61 255 255 255 192 62 125 255 255 255 128 125 259 255 255 255 0 Configuration This section describes the specific IP address lease renew and release mechanisms for both the Mac and PC with either DHCP or MaclP address serving DHCP Address Serving Windows 95 Workstation The Win95 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour The Win95 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the machine is shut down The lease can be manually expired using the WINIPCFG program from the Win95 machine which is a command line program executable from the DOS prompt or from the START RUN menu
135. e TCP service port where the traffic is to be directed For example a Web browser will locate a Web server by using a combination of the IP address and TCP port that the client machine has set up Just as an IP address specifies a particular computer on a network ports are addresses that specify a particular service in a computer There are many universally agreed upon ports assigned to various services For example m Web servers typically use port number 80 m All FTP servers use port number 21 m Telnet uses port number 23 m SNMP uses port number 161 To help direct incoming IP traffic to the appropriate server the Netopia R2121 lets you associate these and other port numbers to distinct IP addresses on your internal LAN using Exported Services See IP setup on page 10 6 for details Using multiple Connection Profiles You can enable Network Address Translation on one connection profile disable it on another and use the two profiles simultaneously The profiles might have the following attributes m A profile with Network Address Translation disabled connects to your branch or main office Your company network administrator has assigned you a local IP address range that is consistent with the address space assigned to your company so that you seamlessly integrate when connected The remote IP address and mask for this profile define only the company s address space so that the only IP traffic you send over this connection is f
136. e a new passcode for the call negotiation When using PAP TOKEN your passcode is valid for one call negotiation For a second call negotiation you must enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication token card every 60 seconds You will be able to access information at the remote site that you are connecting to once authentication is successfully completed Establishing a manual connection call To establish a Manual connection call select WAN Configuration from the Main Menu and press Return 1 Select Establish WAN Connection from the WAN Configuration screen and press Return The Establish WAN Connection screen displays a table of all of the connection profiles you have defined Highlight the connection profile you wish to manually call Press Return to initiate the call Call Status Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Connection State Dialing Channel 1 State Acquiring Channel 2 State 0 Challenge Enter PASSCODE Passcode 123412345678 Hit ESCAPE RETURN ENTER to return to previous menu 2 From the fields that appear select Enter PASSCODE and press Return Enter your PIN and the code displayed on your security authentication token card LED screen 3 Once the call is established and you enter your passcode as prompted PPP negotiation will continue If the call is specified for PAP TOKEN and the session involves more than one connection you will be prompted for each channel being brought up
137. e all calls in regardless of their source Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 5 If an incoming call is not required to match a connection profile and fails to do so it is accepted as a standard IP connection Accepted unmatched calls adopt the call parameter values set in the Default Answer Profile To determine the call parameter values that unmatched calls will adopt customize the Default Answer Profile parameters in the Default Answer Profile screen Customizing the default profile You can customize the Netopia Router s default profile in the Default Answer Profile screen 1 Select Default Answer Profile in the WAN Configuration screen Press Return The Default Profile screen appears Default Answer Profile Calling Number Authentication Preferred Must Match a Defined Profile Yes PPP Authentication Bandwidth Allocation Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen 2 To enable CNA authentication select Calling Number Authentication in the Default Answer Profile screen and choose one of the following settings Ignored Calling Number Authentication CNA is not in effect Preferred This is the default setting Authentication is attempted if the calling number is available If authentication fails or the calling number is not available the call proceeds as usual and the caller may still connect successfully Use this setting if you expect to receive both regular and CNA authentic
138. e file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for 15 10 User s Reference Guide example bigroot config myfile m Select Read Config Now and press Return You will see the following dialog box Are you sure you want to read the configuration now The device will reset when the transfer is complete CONTINUE m Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect m f you choose to download the configuration file the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Uploading configuration files Using TFTP you can send a file containing a snapshot of the Router s current configuration to a TFTP server The file can then be downloaded by a different Netopia R2121 unit to configure its parameters see Downloading configuration files on page 15 9 This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with identical parameters or just for creating configuration backup files Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Netopia R2121 unit by Netopia or your network administrator To upload a configuration
139. e packet was sent from m The destination IP address where the packet is going m The type of highertayer Internet protocol the packet is carrying such as TCP or UDP 14 8 User s Reference Guide Port numbers A filter can also match a packet s port number attributes but only if the filter s protocol type is set to TCP or UDP since only those protocols use port numbers The filter can be configured to match the following m The source port number the port on the sending host that originated the packet m The destination port number the port on the receiving host that the packet is destined for By matching on a port number a filter can be applied to selected TCP or UDP services such as Telnet FTP and World Wide Web The tables below show a few common services and their associated port numbers Internet service TCP port Internet service TCP port FTP 20 21 Finger 79 Telnet 23 World Wide Web 80 SMTP mail 25 News 144 Gopher 70 rlogin 513 Internet service UDP port Internet service UDP port Who Is 43 AppleTalk Routing 202 Maintenance at tmp World Wide Web 80 AppleTalk Name Binding 202 at nbp SNMP 161 AURP AppleTalk 387 TFTP 69 who 513 Port number comparisons A filter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packet s source or destination port number The comparison options are No Compare No comparison of the port number specified in the filter with the pack
140. ection are for example purposes only Do not use these addresses when configuring your network With this configuration both Customer Site A and B can gain Internet access through Routers A and B with no reconfiguration of the ISP s equipment The most important item in this configuration is the Static Route defined on Router B This tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Netopia R2121 B Without this information Customer Site B will be able to access Customer Site A but not the Internet If it is not possible to define a Static Route on Router B RIP could be enabled to serve the same purpose To use RIP instead of a Static Route enable Transmit RIP on Netopia R2121 A and Transmit and Receive RIP on Router B This will allow the route from Customer Site B to propagate on Router B and Customer Site A Example Working with a Class C subnet Suppose that your organization has a site with only 10 hosts and no plans to add any new hosts You don t need a full Class C address for this site Many ISPs offer Internet access with only a portion of a full Internet address For example you may obtain the Class C address 199 14 17 48 with the mask 255 255 255 240 From the previous example you can see that this gives you 14 host addresses to distribute to the hosts at your site In effect your existing network of 10 hosts is a subnet of the ISP s network Since the Class C address has already been reduced to subnets you
141. ed for example by devices which may no longer be on the network Monitoring Tools 13 13 System Information The System Information screen gives a summary view of the general system level values in the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router From the Statistics amp Logs menu select System Information The System Information screen appears System Information Serial Number 7340872 Firmware Version 4 3 Processor Speed MHz 33 Flash ROM Capacity MBytes 1 DRAM Capacity MBytes 4 Ethernet 8 Port 10Base T Auxiliary Serial Port LocalTalk WAN 1 Interface 56K Modem WAN 2 Interface 56K Modem AppleTalk Feature Set Installed SNMP The Netopia R2121 includes a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent allowing monitoring and configuration by a standard SNMP manager The Netopia R2121 supports the following Management Information Base MIB documents MIB II RFC 1213 Interface MIB RFC 1229 Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 AppleTalk MIB RFC 1243 Netopia MIB These MIBs are on the Netopia R2121 CD included with the Netopia R2121 You should load these MIBs into your SNMP management software in the order they are listed here Follow the instructions included with your SNMP manager on how to load MIBs 13 14 User s Reference Guide The SNMP Setup screen To go to the SNMP Setup screen from the Main Menu select SNMP in the System Configuration screen and press Return Main System Menu Configuration SNMP SNMP Setup
142. ed the Netopia R2121 will look at the destination port and will find that it is destined for Port 21 FTP The Netopia R2121 then looks at the internal user defined Exported Services table and finds that any incoming IP traffic from the WAN port with a destination of Port 21 FTP should be redirected to the IP address of 192 168 5 3 on the local LAN interface which in this case is Workstation B Once the appropriate Exported Services are defined there can be seamless communication between a host on the Internet and a host on the Netopia R2121 s local LAN interface D 6 User s Reference Guide Important notes Even with the advantages of NAT there are several things you should note carefully There is no formally agreed upon method among router vendors to handle an all zeros IPCP request The majority of router vendors use the all zeros IPCP request to determine when a dial in host wants to be assigned an IP address Some vendors however attempt to negotiate and establish routing with an all zeros IP address The Netopia R2121 will not allow routing to be established with an all zeros IP address and the call will be dropped with an error logged in the Device Event History When using NAT it is most likely that the Netopia R2121 will be receiving an IP address from a pool of dynamic IP addresses at the ISP This means that the Netopia R2121 s IP presence on the Internet will change with each connection This can potentially cause proble
143. ed by a user attached to the Internet Thus if a user on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface has an IP address of 100 1 1 2 while the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface is 100 1 1 2 and the local host wishes to access a host on the Internet with the address of 100 1 1 8 the Netopia R2121 has no way of knowing that the 200 1 1 8 address is actually on the Internet and not on its local LAN interface as the local LAN interface is assigned the IP address range of 200 1 1 1 to 200 1 1 14 Configuration Network Address Translation is enabled by default with the SmartStart configuration utility You can toggle Enable Address Translation to NO or YES in the Connection Profile screen in System Configuration under the IP Profile Parameters section NAT is enabled on a per profile basis so itis possible to have any combination of NAT and non NAT profiles An example of enabling NAT is as follows Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior D 7 IP Profile Parameters Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Address Translation Enabled Yes Filter Set Remove Filter Set Receive RIP Enter the remote IP network s IP address form xxx xxx xxx xxx decimal Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Toggling Address Translation Enabled to Yes enables the Netopia R2121 to send out an all zeros IPCP address that requests an IP to be assigned to the Netopia R2121 s WAN interface Note that the remote IP address is 127 0
144. edule If How Often is set to Once Only the item directly below How Often reads Set Once Only Schedule Set Weekly Schedule If you set How Often to Weekly select Set Weekly Schedule and go to the Set Weekly Schedule screen m Select the days for the scheduled connection to occur and toggle them to Yes Monday Set Weekly Schedule Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Scheduled Window Start Time AM or PM Scheduled Window Duration Per Day m Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection m You must enter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 11 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected m Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM from the pop up menu m Select Scheduled Window Duration Per Day and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled connection per call m If you selected Periodic as your Schedule Type in the previous screen an additional item Every appears Set the period of time between connections for example every 15 minutes You are finished configuring the weekly options Return to the Add Scheduled Con
145. efective Product and proof of purchase shipping prepaid to Netopia with the RMA number prominently displayed on the outside of the package If you are located outside of the United States or Canada please contact your dealer in order to arrange for warranty service THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY NETOPIA ALONE AND THEY ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES MADE BY ANYONE REGARDING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR S MAKE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED ABOVE NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR S DO NOT WARRANT GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS ASSUMED BY YOU THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IN THAT CASE ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY OF THE PRODUCT THERE MAY BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT YOU MAY HAVE WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO J URISDICTION REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL NETOPIA ITS LICENSOR S AND THE DIRECTORS OFFICERS EMPLOYEE
146. elect v1 v2 or Both from the popup menu With Receive RIP set to v1 the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask Set to v2 the Netopia R2121 will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks Set to Both the Netopia R2121 will accept information from either RIP v1 or 10 10 User s Reference Guide v2 routers m If you want the Netopia R2121 to advertise its routing table to other routers via RIP select Transmit RIP and select v1 v2 broadcast or v2 multicast from the popup menu With Transmit RIP v1 selected the Netopia R2121 will generate RIP packets only to other RIP v1 routers With Transmit RIP v2 broadcast selected the Netopia R2121 will generate RIP packets to all other hosts on the network With Transmit RIP v2 multicast selected the Netopia R2121 will generate RIP packets only to other routers capable of recognizing RIP v2 packets IP subnets The IP Subnets screen allows you to configure up to eight Ethernet IP subnets one primary subnet and up to seven secondary subnets by entering IP address subnet mask pairs IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet In that case you can continue to enter or edit the IP address
147. emote subnets from the limited number of IP addresses issued by your ISP or other authority You can do this using connection profiles These subnets can be nested within the range of IP addresses available to your network For example suppose that you obtain the Class C network address a b c 0 to be distributed among three networks This network address can be used on your main network while portions of it can be subnetted to the two remaining networks Note The IP address a b c 0 has letters in place of the first three numbers to generalize it for this example The figure at left shows a possible network configuration following this scheme The main network is set up with the Class C address a b c 0 and contains Router A which could be a Netopia R2121 a Netopia R2121 anda number of other hosts Router A maintains a link to the Internet and may be used as the default gateway Internet a b c 16 ka a b c 0 a b c 2 Router B Router C lt a b c 128 a b c 248 a b c 129 el a b c 249 c n C 12 User s Reference Guide Routers B and C which could also be Netopia R2121s serve the two remote networks that are subnets of a b c 0 The subnetting is accomplished by configuring the Netopia R2121 with connection profiles for Routers B and C see the following table Connection profile Remote IP address Remote IP mask Eng availasie Eno address for Router B a b c 128 255 255 255 192 7 for Router
148. en select Device Event History in the Statistics amp Logs screen Device Event History Current Date 11 22 98 02 03 27 AM 11 22 98 203 AURP initialization complete 11 22 98 203 AppleTalk initialization complete 11 22 98 203 IPX initialization complete 11 22 98 203 IP address server initialization complete 11 22 98 203 BOOT Warm start v4 3 11 22 98 202 IPX initialization complete 11 22 98 202 IP address server initialization complete 11 22 98 202 BOOT Warm start v4 3 11 22 98 259 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed 11 22 98 259 IPX initialization complete 11 22 98 259 IP address server initialization complete 11 22 98 259 BOOT Cold start v4 3 11 22 98 255 AppleTalk initialization complete 11 22 98 7 55 07 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items To scroll up select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and press the Return key To scroll down select the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the list and press Return 13 8 User s Reference Guide To obtain more information about any event listed in the Device Event History select the event and then press Return A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear Press Return or the Escape key to d
149. ent History and the Device Event History retain records of the 128 most recent events To go to the Event Histories screens select either WAN Event History or Device Event History in the Statistics amp Logs screen 13 6 User s Reference Guide Statistics amp Logs WAN Event History Device Event History IP Routing Table IPX Routing Table IPX SAP Bindery Table AppleTalk Routing Table Served IP Addresses General Statistics System Information WAN Event History The WAN Event History screen lists a total of 128 events on the WAN The most recent events appear at the top To go to the WAN Event History screen select WAN Event History in the Statistics amp Logs screen WAN Event History Current Date 11 22 98 01 57 07 AM SCROLL UP 11 22 98 BACP negotiated session 1 11 22 98 7 CCP negotiated session 1 type Ascend LZS 11 22 98 IPXCP negotiated session 1 11 22 98 IPCP negotiated session 1 rem 163 176 249 1 11 22 98 i MP negotiated session 1 11 22 98 PAP remote accepted us Channel 1 11 22 98 NCP up session 1 Channel 1 11 22 98 Channel 1 up Dialout 11 22 98 Received Connect Ind for DN 92384175 11 22 98 gt gt WAN data link activated at 115 Kbps 11 22 98 ASYNC Modem carrier detected more 11 22 98 gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN not supplied 11 22 98 Link 1 down PPP PAP failure 11 22 98 A Issued Clear Response to DN
150. ent transmissions Unused Memory The total remaining system memory available for use Domain Name Server If you are using the router s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your default gateway it is shown here Call Acct Shows whether you have enabled or disabled the call accounting features Domain Name the domain name you have assigned typically the name of your ISP MAC Address The Netopia R2121 s hardware address for those interfaces that support DHCP IP Address The Netopia R2121 s IP address entered in the IP Setup screen IPX Address The Netopia R2121 s IPX address entered in the IPX Setup screen EtherTalk Address The Netopia R2121 s AppleTalk address on its EtherTalk Phase Il interface entered in the EtherTalk Phase II Setup screen only if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed LocalTalk Address The Netopia R2121 s AppleTalk address on its LocalTalk interface entered in the LocalTalk Setup screen only if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed Monitoring Tools 13 3 Current Status The current status section is a table showing the current status of the WAN For example WAN Status Current WAN Connection Status Profile Name State Use Remote Address Est More In ISP Pl 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lel NAT 192 163 100 6 Profile Name Lists the name of the connection profile being used if any This field will also indicate if the lin
151. eous and separate sessions Multiple users calling a single destination single session Multiple users calling multiple destinations two simultaneous and separate sessions Security authentication components To properly identify and authenticate an authorized user the following are required A secret personal identification number PIN for each user A security authentication token card m A Security Access Control Module ACM Note The Netopia R2121 currently only supports Ascend routers as ACMs m An external Netopia R2121 calling into a designated server For example a telecommuter dialing into a remote site from a Netopia R2121 interested in accessing personal email or file sharing services Note The Netopia R2121 does not include a security authentication token card Configuring for security authentication To configure the Netopia R2121 to support security authentication select an authentication method and set up a designated connection profile from the System Configuration screen or your first connection profile from Easy Setup 1 From the WAN Configuration menu select Display Change Connection Profile From the pop up menu that appears select a Connection Profile In the Connection Profile screen select Datalink Options Main WAN Dis play Change Menu Configuration Connection Profile gt Datalink Options Security 14 39 Datalink PPP MP Options
152. er than 1023 OpenWindows and X Windows traffic would otherwise be allowed by input filter 4 Input filters 1 and 2 must precede input filter 4 otherwise they would have no effect as filter 4 would have already passed OpenWindows and X Windows traffic Input filter 3 This filter explicitly passes all WAN originated ICMP traffic to permit devices on the WAN to ping devices on the LAN Ping is an Internet service that is useful for diagnostic purposes Input filters 4 and 5 These filters pass all TCP and UDP traffic respectively when the destination port is greater than 1023 This type of traffic generally does not allow a remote host to connect to the LAN using one of the potentially intrusive Internet services such as Telnet FTP and WWW Output filter 1 This filter passes all outgoing traffic to make sure that no outgoing connections from the LAN are blocked 14 20 User s Reference Guide Basic Firewall is suitable for a LAN containing only client hosts that wish to access servers on the WAN not for a LAN containing servers providing services to clients on the WAN Basic Firewall s general strategy is to explicitly pass WAN originated TCP and UDP traffic to ports greater than 1023 Ports lower than 1024 are the service origination ports for various Internet services such as FTP Telnet and the World Wide Web WWW A more complicated filter set would be required to provide WAN access to a LAN based server See Possible modificatio
153. ern m You may choose when the Netopia R2121 s modem connection tones are audible Supported options are Selection Behavior Never Turns off all speaker activity and hides the Speaker Volume control Until Carrier The default Allows call placement and handshaking tones to be heard During Same as above but blocks dialing tones Answer Always Allows carrier tones to be heard as well m You can specify how to use the auxiliary serial port on the Netopia R2121 s back panel By default this port is enabled for an external asynchronous modem If you have installed the optional AppleTalk feature set then this port defaults to a LocalTalk connection See AppleTalk Setup on page 12 1 for more 9 4 User s Reference Guide information on how to use the optional AppleTalk feature set oap Netopia R2121 back panel Ethernet Power oso Auxillary serial port HD 15 female For external modem applications the Data Rate pop up offers a variety of clock rates from 9600 to 230 Kbps The default is 57 6 kbps You may also specify the Modem Init String for your modem and the Directory Number of the telephone line connected to the third port Note If you change the modem init string you must restart the system From the Main Menu go to Utilities amp Diagnostics and select Restart System The router will reboot and your changes will be
154. ers to suit your requirements To go to the Console Configuration screen select Console Configuration in the System Configuration screen Console Configuration Baud Rate Hardware Flow Control SET CONFIG NOW Follow these steps to change a parameter s value 1 Select the parameter you want to change 2 Select a new value for the parameter Return to step 1 if you want to configure another parameter 3 Select SET CONFIG NOW to save the new parameter settings Select CANCEL to leave the parameters unchanged and exit the Console Configuration screen WAN and System Configuration 8 13 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These screens allow you to monitor and configure your network by means of a standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent m Details are given in SNMP on page 13 13 Security These screens allow you to add users and define passwords on your network m Details are given in Security on page 14 1 Upgrade Feature Set You can upgrade your Netopia R2121 by adding new feature sets through the Upgrade Feature Set utility See the release notes that came with your router or feature set upgrade or visit the Netopia web site at www netopia com for information on new feature sets how to obtain them and how to install them on your Netopia R2121 Logging You can configure a UNIX compatible syslog client to report a number of subsets of the events entered in the router s WAN Even
155. es a new item called RIP IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 15 Metric appears below Advertise Route Via RIP With RIP Metric you set the number of routers from 1 to 15 between the sending router and the destination router The maximum number of routers on a packet s route is 15 Setting RIP Metric to 1 means that a route can involve 15 routers while setting it to 15 means a route can only involve one router m Select ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW to save the new static route or select CANCEL to discard it and return to the Static Routes screen m Up to 16 static routes can be created but one is always reserved for the default gateway which is configured using either Easy Setup or the IP Setup screen in System Configuration Modifying a static route To modify a static route select Display Change Static Route in the Static Routes screen to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and go to the Change Static Route screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Static Route screen see Adding a static route on page 10 14 Deleting a static route To delete a static route select Delete Static Route in the Static Routes screen to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and press Return to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected static route press the Escape key Rules of static route installation The Netopia R2121 a
156. eset the Netopia R2121 to its factory default settings Select the Revert to Factory Defaults item in the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen and press Return Select CONTINUE in the dialog box and press Return The Netopia R2121 will reboot and its settings will return to the factory defaults deleting your configurations In an emergency you can also use the Reset Switch to return the router to its factory default settings Call Netopia Tech Support for instructions on using the Reset Switch Note Reset to factory defaults with caution You will need to reconfigure all your settings in the router Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP is a method of transferring data over an IP network TFTP is a client server application with the Router as the client To use the Router as a TFTP client a TFTP server must be available Netopia Inc has a public access TFTP server on the Internet where you can obtain the latest firmware versions To use TFTP select Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP in the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen and press Return to go to the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP screen 15 8 User s Reference Guide Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP TFTP Server Name Firmware File Name GET FIRMWARE FROM SERVER GET MODEM FIRMWARE FROM SERVER Config File Name GET CONFIG FROM SERVER SEND CONFIG TO SERVER TFTP Transfer State Idle TFTP Cu
157. ess m Static NAT Network Address Translation Security is made simpler and more reliable by only having to firewall one IP address and by obscuring the internal network structure from the Internet 10 2 User s Reference Guide Network Address Translation works by remapping the source IP address of traffic from the LAN to a single static or dynamically assigned IP address shown to the remote side of the router HOW NAT WORKS With NAT 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 102 192 168 1 103 ISP 163 167 132 1 lt _ 192 168 1 104 192 168 1 105 192 168 1 106 JNM Without NAT 163 167 132 1 163 167 132 1 lt q ____ 163 167 132 2 163 167 132 2 163 167 132 3 163 167 132 3 lt q 163 167 132 4 163 167 132 5 A 163 167 132 4 163 167 132 6 Ne l 163 167 132 5 163 167 132 6 or corporate intranet router The feature can be implemented on a per Connection Profile basis The network router can use two or more Connection Profiles simultaneously to connect to two or more networks Each profile may have Network Address Translation enabled When Network Address Translation is enabled the Netopia R2121 can either use a statically assigned IP address or one dynamically assigned each time the router connects to the ISP While a dynamically assigned IP address offers the ISP more flexibility it does have an important limitation The router will require a static IP address to support Web FTP or other services available to the WAN T
158. ess screen SmartStart tests to see if the router can place calls on your telephone line While it is testing the connection a dialog box is l displayed and the LEDs flash l _o jvm Connection Test Progress screen SmartStart displays a dialog box showing you that your connection profile is being tested If this test fails check the physical connections between the computer the router and the wall jack or jacks Check for errors in any manual entries you made during the configuration process Final screen When the connection tests successfully SmartStart displays a screen telling you that your e5 Yoa crv iaa kat bear iaoa configuration is now complete w ee Ea e In most cases this SmartStart configuration is all that you need to get your router up and running and connected to the Internet However you may want to take advantage of additional features or special configuration options available through the console based configuration interface For detailed instructions see Console based Management on page 6 1 3 8 User s Reference Guide Advanced option Router IP Address screen If you selected the Advanced e STE option in the Easy or Advanced options screen on E Deepen nnn ctaee page 3 4 SmartStart asks you to choose between ee entering the router s current IP address and assigning an ese meet eel eiiees IP address to the router e ne If the router has already been assigned an IP address
159. et 14 15 defined 14 4 deleting 14 17 input 14 15 modifying 14 17 output 14 15 parts of 14 7 priority 14 5 using 14 12 viewing 14 17 finding an ISP B 1 firewall 14 18 firmware files updating with TFTP 15 8 updating with XMODEM 15 11 FTP sessions 14 21 further reading F 1 G General Statistics 13 4 Glossary GL 1 H hard seeding 12 3 Hops 13 10 how to reach us A 3 Input filter 3 14 19 Input filters 1 and 2 14 19 Input filters 4 and 5 14 19 Internet addresses see IP addresses Internet Protocol IP 10 1 Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX 11 1 IP address serving 10 16 IP addresses about C 1 distribution rules C 10 static C8 IP addresses distributing C 5 IP Addressing C 1 IP setup 10 6 IP Setup for Small Office models 10 7 10 9 IPX packet filter sets 14 24 IPX packet filters 14 23 IPX SAP Bindery Table 11 7 IPX SAP filters 14 26 IPX Setup 11 1 IPX Spoofing 11 3 ISP account types B 2 finding B 1 Index 3 L LED Status 13 3 LEDs 24 13 3 LocalTalk 12 7 connecting 56 setup 12 7 MaclP 10 16 defined C 8 MaclP Kip Forwarding options 10 21 MaclIP Setup 12 3 MaclP KIP Clients 10 21 MaclP KIP static options 10 21 MIBs supported 13 13 Modifying IP trap receivers 13 16 multiple subnets 10 10 N NAT attributes 10 5 defined 10 1 features 10 2 guidelines 10 5 using 10 3 navigating Easy Setup 64 Navigating through the configuration screens 8 8 NCSA Telnet 6 3 Nested IP subnets C 11 NetBIOS
160. et Forwarding No Incoming outgoing Packet amp On SAP filter Periodic RIP SAP timers 60 seconds 8 10 User s Reference Guide Default settings Layer Category Parameter Type Options Datalink Layer PPP MP Parameters Data Compression Ascend LZS Send Authentication PAP Channel Usage Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation BAP Maximum Packet Size 1500 Physical Layer Telco Parameters Dial is set to Dial In Out Dial On Demand is set to Yes Callback is set to No Idle Time out is set for 300 seconds To access the System Configuration screens select System Configuration in the Main Menu then press Return The System Configuration Menu screen appears Return Enter to configure Networking Protocols such as TCP IP Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup System Configuration Network Protocols Setup Filter Sets Firewalls IP Address Serving Date and Time Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Logging WAN and System Configuration 8 11 Network Protocols Setup These screens allow you to configure your network s use of the standard networking protocols m P details are given in IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 m PX details are given in IPX Setup on page 11 1 m AppleTalk details are given in AppleTalk Se
161. et and type numbers and network and node addresses are null all zeros This sets the filter to match on any IPX SAP packet entry You should configure the filter using criteria that meet your needs Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter 1 Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter 2 To specify a server name for the filter to match on select Server Name and enter the name of an IPX server You can use the wildcard characters asterisk and question mark Use to match any string including a null string no characters and to match any single character in the server s name For example the filter could match on the server name NETOPIA with NETO NETO IA and NETOPIA 3 To specify a socket for the filter to match on select Socket and enter an IPX socket number 4 To specify a type number for the filter to match on select Type and enter an IPX type number 5 To specify an IPX network address for the filter to match on select IPX Network and enter an IPX network address 6 To specify an IPX node address for the filter to match on select IPX Node Address and enter an IPX node address 7 Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter Select CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter screen without saving the new filter 14 28 User s Reference Guide Deleting a SAP filter To delete a SAP filter select Delete IPX SAP filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen
162. et s port number Not Equal To For the filter to match the packet s port number cannot equal the port number specified in the filter Less Than For the filter to match the packet s port number must be less than the port number specified in the filter Less Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be less than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must equal the port number specified in the filter Greater Than For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than the port number specified in the filter Security 14 9 Greater Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Other filter attributes There are three other attributes to each filter m The filter s order i e priority in the filter set m Whether the filter is currently active m Whether the filter is set to pass forward packets or to block discard packets Putting the parts together When you display a filter set its filters are displayed as rows in a table 211 211 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The table s columns correspond to each filter s attributes The filter s priority in the set Filter number 1 with the highest priority is first in the table Source IP Addr The packet source IP address to match Dest IP Addr The packet de
163. etopia R2121 and want the new parameter values to take effect Under certain circumstances restarting the system may also clear up system or network malfunctions Some configuration processes automatically restart the system to apply the changes you have made 15 14 User s Reference Guide Part Ill Appendixes User s Reference Guide Troubleshooting A 1 Appendix A Troubleshooting This appendix is intended to help you troubleshoot problems you may encounter while setting up and using the Netopia R2121 It also includes information on how to contact Netopia Technical Support Important information on these problems may be found in the event histories kept by the Netopia R2121 These event histories can be accessed in the Statistics Utilities Tests screen This section covers the following topics m Configuration problems on page A 1 m Power outages on page A 3 m Technical support on page A 3 Configuration problems If you encounter problems during your initial configuration process review the following suggestions before calling for technical support There are four zones to consider when troubleshooting initial configuration 1 the computer s connection to the router 2 the router s connection to the telecommunication line s 3 the telecommunication line s connection to your ISP and 4 the ISP s connection to the Internet If the connection from the computer to the router was not successful
164. evious value Esc Move one item up Up arrow or Control k Move one item down Down arrow or Control j Display a dump of the device event log Control e Display a dump of the WAN event log Control f Refresh the screen Control L Go to topmost selectable item lt Go to bottom right selectable item gt Easy Setup 7 1 Chapter 7 Easy Setup This chapter describes how to use the Easy Setup console screens on your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router The Easy Setup console screens provide an alternate method for experienced users to set up their router s Connection Profiles without using SmartStart After completing the Easy Setup console screens your router will be ready to connect to the Internet or another remote site Easy Setup console screens Using three Easy Setup console screens you can m modify a Connection Profile for your Router for the connection to your ISP or remote location m setup IP addresses and IP address serving m password protect configuration access to your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router How to access the Easy Setup console screens To access the console screens Telnet to the Netopia Router over your Ethernet network or you can physically connect with a serial console cable and access the Netopia Router with a terminal emulation program See Connecting through a Telnet session on page 6 2 or Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 No
165. f you are on a PBX or Centrex phone system and Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 3 require a prefix for an outside line m Enter the optional telephone or Directory Numbers for the two onboard modems to provide the Netopia R2121 with the information needed to establish a two channel call using MP or BAP This will advise the remote side of an inbound data call how to connect to a second channel Note When placing multi channel calls the answering equipment must either m beina hunt group where a single telephone number services multiple lines or m the answering side must implement MP or BAP as a method to advise the calling side what number s to use ISPs or corporate IS groups will meet these conditions For other non standard dialup connections you should verify that one or the other of these conditions is true m You may choose to selectively Answer inbound calls based on a distinctive ring pattern on each onboard modem This permits you to set up a party line configuration where a fax machine or other device shares the line but uses a different telephone number and ring pattern Supported options are Ring Type Description Any the default any pattern Ring A 2 0 sec ON 4 0 sec OFF normal North American ring pattern Ring B 0 8 sec ON 0 4 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 4 0 sec OFF Ring C 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 4 0 sec OFF Never the line will not answer to any ring patt
166. features on page 10 1 m Using Network Address Translation on page 10 3 m IP setup on page 10 6 m IP address serving on page 10 16 Network Address Translation allows communication between the LAN connected to the Netopia R2121 and the Internet using a single IP address instead of a routed account with separate IP addresses for each computer on the network Network Address Translation also provides increased security by hiding the local IP addresses of the LAN connected to the Netopia R2121 from the outside world With SmartIP the setup is simpler so Internet service providers typically offer dial up accounts supporting Network Address Translation at a significant cost savings Network Address Translation features m NAT is selectable on a per connection basis optionally allowing real addresses to be used for intranet connections and proxied addresses to be used for Internet connections m The NAT user can use any combination of proxied and unproxied addresses simultaneously on the available Telco channels For instance one unproxied address connection profile can be used to connect to a central office while another proxied address connection profile can simultaneously connect the user s Netopia R2121 and LAN to the Internet m The single proxy address is acquired at connection time from the answering side The address can be assigned by the remote router from either a dynamic pool of addresses or a fixed static addr
167. file call accounting to track first minutes and additional minutes for initiated data and voice calls Main WAN Call Accounting Menu a Configuration a Configuration To go to the Call Accounting screen select Call Accounting Configuration in the WAN Configuration screen Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 13 Call Accounting Configuration Enable Call Accounting On Day for auto reset of timers 12 Maximum Aggregate connect time 12 00 To enable call accounting follow these steps 1 2 Select Enable Call Accounting and toggle it to On Select Day for auto reset of timers and enter the day of the month for the Router to reset the Call Account ing Statistics Select Maximum Aggregate connect time HH MM and enter the total amount of time to allow for out bound calls where HH is the hour using either the 12 hour or 24 hour clock and MM is the minutes 9 14 User s Reference Guide Once you have enabled Call Accounting you can specify per connection profile limits in the Telco Options for each profile Go to Main Menu WAN Display Change Configuration Connection Profile Telco Options Enter the total amount of time to allow for outbound calls Telco Options Dial Dial In Out Dialing Prefix Number to Dial Alternate Site to Dial Dial on Demand Idle Timeout seconds CNA Validation Number Callback No
168. ge 3 3 for details on running SmartStart 2 4 User s Reference Guide Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Back Panel Ports The figure below displays the back of the Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog back panel Telco or line ports Ethernet Crossover switch Auxiliary port Power port 8 port Ethernet hub Console port Making the Physical Connections 2 5 The following table describes all the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router back panel ports Port Description Power port a mini DIN8 power adapter cable connection Telco 1 port a red RJ 11 telephone jack labelled Telco 1 Console port a DE 9 Console port for a direct serial connection to the console screens You may use this if you are an experienced user and choose not to use SmartStart See Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 Phone 1 and 2 two yellow Phone ports above the Console port for attaching analog telephone devices such as phones or fax machines to share the telephone lines Auxiliary port an HD 15 Auxiliary port for attaching an external modem or the optional AppleTalk kit Telco 2 port a red RJ 11 telephone jack labelled Telco 2 If you have only one telephone wall jack supporting either one or two telephone numbers use the Telco 1 port Telco 1 supports two phone connections on a single line Telco 2
169. gh If you had this filter set for example Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Deny FTP access Deny all other packets 14 32 User s Reference Guide and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would pass through the first filter rule WWW match the second rule FTP and the packet is allowed through Even though the next rule is to deny all FTP traffic the FTP packet will never make it to this rule Binary Representation It is easiest when doing filtering to convert the IP address and mask in question to binary This will allow you to perform the logical AND to determine if a packet matches a filter rule Logical ANDing When a packet is compared in most cases a logical AND is performed First the IP addresses and subnet masks are converted to binary and then ANDed together The rules for logical ANDing are as follows 0 AND 0 0 0 AND 1 0 1 AND 0 0 1 AND 1 1 For example Filter rule Deny IP 163 176 1 15 BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 Mask 255 255 255 255 BINARY 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 Incoming Packet IP 163 176 1 15 BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 AND the incoming packet and subnet mask together the result is 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 which matches the IP address in the filter rule and the packet is denied Implied Rules With a given set of filter rules there is an Implied rule which may or may not be shown to the user The implied ru
170. gy description of the theory and application and an explanation of the standardization process Spragins J D et al Telecommunications Protocols and Design Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1991 Stallings W Data and Computer Communications New York New York Macmillan Publishing Company 1991 Stallings W Handbook of Computer Communications Standards Vols 1 3 Carmel Indiana Howard W Sams Inc 1990 Stallings W Local Networks 3rd ed New York New York Macmillan Publishing Company 1990 Stevens W R TCP IP Illustrated Vol 1 Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1994 Sunshine C A ed Computer Network Architectures and Protocols 2nd ed New York New York Plenum Press 1989 Tannenbaum A S Computer Networks 2nd ed Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1988 Terplan K Communication Networks Management Englewood Cliffs New J ersey Prentice Hall 1992 Tsuchiya P Components of OSI ISS Intra Domain Routing ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 3 No 8 August 1989 Tsuchiya P Components of OSI Routing An Overview ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 3 No 8 August 1989 Zimmerman H OSI Reference Model The ISO Model of Architecture for Open Systems Interconnection IEEE Transactions on Communications COM 28 No 4 April 1980 F 4 User s Reference Guide Technical Specifications and Safety Inf
171. h NAT enabled instead of negotiating the LAN interface address the Netopia R2121 suggests the address 0 0 0 0 through IPCP When the Router at the ISP sees this all zeros IPCP request the Router can either pull a free dynamic IP address from its pool and assign it to the Netopia R2121 s WAN interface or if configured to do so match the Netopia R2121 s incoming connection profile and assign a pre configured static IP address to the Netopia R2121 s WAN interface From the previous diagram you can see that the IP address assigned to the Netopia R2121 s WAN interface is 200 1 1 40 while the IP address assigned to the LAN interface remains the same The LAN interface address 192 168 5 1 is thus hidden from the ISP and the Internet and the Netopia R2121 only has a single valid IP presence on the Internet The LAN interface IP address for the Netopia R2121 can be any IP address however itis recommended that you use the IANA specified 192 168 X X Class C address range which is used for networks not attached to the Internet This address range is described in RFC 1597 The dynamic IP address acquisition on the WAN interface of the Netopia R2121 is one of several features of NAT Another is the mapping of locally assigned IP addresses to the single globally unique IP address acquired by the Netopia R2121 on its WAN interface NAT employs several things to accomplish this seamlessly You must look at the formatting of an IP packet before IP address remapping
172. hat you have typed here because you will be prompted for it each time you configure this Netopia You can remove an existing Name and Password by clearing both fields below Write Access Name Write Access Password PREVIOUS SCREEN TO MAIN MENU RESTART DEVICE Configure a Configuration Access Name and Password here The final step in configuring the Easy Setup console screens is to restart the Netopia R2121 so the configuration settings take effect 1 Select RESTART DEVICE A prompt asks you to confirm your choice 2 Select CONTINUE to restart the Netopia Router and have your selections take effect Note You can also restart the system at any time by using the restart utility see Restarting the system on page 15 13 or by turning the Netopia Router off and on with the power switch Easy Setup is now complete WAN and System Configuration 8 1 Chapter 8 WAN and System Configuration This chapter describes how to use the console based management screens to access and configure advanced features of your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router You can customize these features for your individual setup These menus provide a powerful method for experienced users to set up their router s connection profiles and system configuration The next chapter Managing Voice and Data Calls on page 9 1 explains more of the Netopia R2121 s special features for cost control and dial in connections This section covers the following
173. he filter to use on a packet s destination port number Then select Dest Port ID and enter the actual destination port number to match on see the table on page 14 8 Security 14 17 10 When you are finished configuring the filter select ADD THIS FILTER NOW to save the filter in the filter set Select CANCEL to discard the filter Viewing filters To display a view only table of input output filters select Display Change Input Filters Display Change Output Filters in the Add IP Filter Set screen Modifying filters To modify a filter select Display Change Input Filter Display Change Output Filter in the Add IP Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to go to the Change Filter screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Filter screen see Adding filters to a filter set on page 14 15 Change Filter Enabled No Forward No Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 0 Enter the IP specific information for this filter Deleting filters To delete a filter select Delete Input Filter Delete Output Filter in the Add Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select the filter from the table and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit
174. heir structure m Devices that send IP packets About IP addressing Every networking protocol uses some form of addressing in order to ensure that packets are delivered correctly In IP individual network devices that are initial sources and final destinations of packets are usually called hosts instead of nodes but the two terms are interchangeable Each host on an IP network must have a unique IP address An IP address also called an Internet address is a 32 bit number usually expressed as four decimal numbers separated by periods Each decimal number in an IP address represents a 1 byte 8 bit binary number Thus values for each of the four numbers range from 00000000 to 11111111 in binary notation or from 0 to 255 in decimal notation The expression 192 168 1 1 is a typical example of an IP address C 2 User s Reference Guide IP addresses indicate both the identity of the network and the identity of the individual host on the network The number of bits used for the network number and the number of bits used for the host number can vary as long as certain rules are followed The local network manager assigns IP host numbers to individual machines IP addresses are maintained and assigned by the InterNIC a quasi governmental organization now increasingly under the auspices of private industry Note It s very common for an organization to obtain an IP address from a third party usually an Internet service provider ISP ISPs usual
175. hone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 Important safety instructions Caution m The direct plug in power supply serves as the main power disconnect locate the direct plug in power supply near the product for easy access m Foruse only with CSA Certified Class 2 power supply rated 12VDC 1 5A Telecommunication installation cautions m Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm m Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations m Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface m Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines m Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Battery The Netopia R2121 s lithium battery is designed to last for the life of the product The battery is not user ser viceable Caution Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s inst
176. ia R2121 and all other routers to hard seeding In this case any router including the Netopia R2121 that is rebooted will not begin routing if it detects a routing conflict between itself and any other router This last scenario could be useful for detecting and locating routing errors on your network Installing AppleTalk The AppleTalk kit consists of hardware and firmware components that you enable on your router in order to connect an AppleTalk network The LocalTalk connector supplied in the AppleTalk feature expansion kit cable connects to the Auxiliary port on the Netopia R2121 Netopia R2121 back panel Ethernet Power 00 o o o0 Auxiliary conhection port HD 15 female You then enable AppleTalk routing through the Console based management screens To install the AppleTalk features from the Main Menu go to System Configuration and select Upgrade Feature Set AppleTalk Setup 12 5 Main System Upgrade Menu Configuration gt Feature Set The Netopia Feature Set Upgrade screen appears Netopia Feature Set Upgrade You may be able to extend the features of your Netopia by purchasing a Software Upgrade For a list of available upgrades please see the release notes that came with your Netopia or visit the Netopia Communications web site at www netopia com To purchase an upgrade you must provide your Serial Number which is XX X
177. ic Firewall blocks undesirable traffic originating from the WAN in most cases the Internet but passes all traffic originating from the LAN It follows the conservative that which is not expressly permitted is prohibited approach unless an incoming packet expressly matches one of the constituent input filters it will not be forwarded to the LAN Security 14 19 The five input filters and one output filter that make up Basic Firewall are shown in the table below Setting Input filter 1 Input filter 2 Input filter 3 Input filter 4 Input filter 5 a ale Enabled Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Forward No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Protocol type TCP TCP ICMP TCP UDP 0 Source port No Com No Com N A No Com No Com N A comparison pare pare pare pare Source port ID 0 0 N A 0 0 N A Dest port Equal Equal N A Greater Greater N A comparison Than Than Dest port ID 2000 6000 N A 1023 1023 N A Basic Firewall s filters play the following roles Input filters 1 and 2 These block WAN originated OpenWindows and X Windows sessions Service origination requests for these protocols use ports 2000 and 6000 respectively Since these are great
178. in effect Default Answer Profile for Dial in Connections The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router can answer calls as well as initiate them To answer calls the Netopia R2121 uses a Default Answer Profile The Default Answer Profile controls how incoming calls are set up authenticated filtered and more How the Default Answer Profile works The Default Answer Profile works like a guard booth at the gate to your network it scrutinizes incoming calls Like the guard booth the Default Answer Profile allows calls based on a set of criteria that you define The main criterion used to check calls is whether they match one of the Connection Profiles already defined If PAP or CHAP authentication is being used the default profile checks that the incoming call s name and pass word secret match the receive name and password secret of a Connection Profile If PAP or CHAP is not being used an incoming call is matched to a Connection Profile using the remote network s IP address that is the caller is defined as the destination of a particular connection profile If an incoming call is matched to an existing Connection Profile the call is accepted All of that Connection Profile s parameters except for authentication are adopted for the call You could set up the Default Answer Profile to allow calls in even if they fail to match a Connection Profile Continuing the guard booth analogy this would be like removing the guards or having them wav
179. ing remapped and causes them to be remapped into a continuous range To override the AppleTalk maximum limit of 15 hops select Enable Hop Count Reduction and toggle it to Yes Hosts on a local AppleTalk network will then see AppleTalk destinations across the IP tunnel as being only one hop away AppleTalk allows a packet up to 15 hops going through 15 AppleTalk routers to reach its destination Packets that must reach destinations more than 15 hops away will not succeed therefore tunneling from one large AppleTalk network to another could exceed that limit In such a case hop count reduction enables full network to network communication You have finished configuring AURP 12 12 User s Reference Guide Monitoring Tools 13 1 Chapter 13 Monitoring Tools This chapter discusses the Netopia R2121 s device and network monitoring tools These tools can provide statistical information report on current network status record events and help in diagnosing and locating problems This section covers the following topics m Quick View status overview on page 13 1 m Statistics amp Logs on page 134 m Event Histories on page 135 m Routing Tables on page 13 8 m Served IP Addresses on page 13 11 m System Information on page 13 13 m SNMP on page 13 13 Quick View status overview You can get a useful overall status report from the Netopia R2121 in the Quick View screen To go to the
180. ing test and may not be accurate until after the test is over However if an escalating one to one correspondence is seen between Packets Out and Packets Lost and Packets In is noticeably lagging behind Packets Out the destination is probably unreachable In this case use STOP PING Round Trip Time Min Max Avg Statistics showing the minimum maximum and average number of seconds elapsing between the time each Ping packet was sent and the time its corresponding return Ping packet was received The time o ive TTL value for each Ping packet sent by the Netopia R2121 is 255 the maximum allowed The TTL value defines the number of IP routers that the packet can traverse Ping packets that reach their TTL value are dropped and a destination unreachable notification is returned to the sender see the table above This ensures that no infinite routing loops occur The TTL value can be set and retrieved using the SNMP MIB4I ip group s ipDefaultTTL object Trace Route You can count the number of routers between your Netopia Router and a given destination with the Trace Route utility Select Trace Route in the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen and press Return to go to the Trace Route screen Utilities and Diagnostics 15 5 Trace Route Host Name or IP Address Maximum Hops Timeout seconds Use Reverse DNS Yes START TRACE ROUTE Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host Trace route to a network host To t
181. ini aiaa 14 23 IPX packet MEF SeS cucnsacucnioenmicnne 14 24 PA SoA E i 14 26 PA SAF MESEIS siccae ne Ean 14 28 Frowa WON innse 14 30 General Firewall Terms ccecce 14 30 Basic IP Packet COMPONGALS cciscsesesestcrecsesesesens 14 30 Basic Protocol TYNES ccstsnisvarsceisvsvarnseavanicereane 14 30 Firewall design MUNG sicion 14 31 Per Ean kniei E 14 33 Example FINES nse 14 34 Token Security Authentication esee 14 37 Securing network EnvirOnMentS c sseeseeeeees 14 37 Using the SecurlD token card 14 37 Security authentication components sees 14 38 Configuring for security authentication s 14 38 Connecting using security authentication 14 39 Chapter 15 Utilities and Diagnostics ccecce 15 1 illo eee ee eens E re ey eae eee ree eect 15 2 TRACE ROUE oireisiin diiad 154 S A A E A E EO EE N 15 5 Secure Authentication Monitor essssssssssersereserssrrreene 15 6 Disconnect Telnet Console SeSSION ccseereeeeeeseeees 15 7 Fact y detA ei e Guneuceiaaind 15 7 Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP 15 7 Updating MWAI cerotto ened EE 15 8 Downloading configuration files cccccccsseeeeeees 15 9 Uploading configuration files cee 15 10 Transferring configuration and firmware files with MOOG sienna tessa ene aenenS 15 10 Updating TINS sriccoresciaasremnanackanien 15 11 Downloading configuration files c ee 15 12 Contents vii Uploading configuration files
182. internet or IP address This is a 32 bit number assigned by the system administrator usually written in the form of 4 decimal fields separated by periods e g 192 9 200 1 Part of the internet address is the IP network number IP network address and part is the host address IP host address All machines on a given IP network use the same IP network number and each machine has a unique IP host address The system administrator sets the subnet mask to specify how much of the address is network number and how much is host address See also Class A B and C networks IP Internet Protocol A networking protocol developed for use on computer systems that use the UNIX operating system Often used with Ethernet cabling systems In this manual IP is used as an umbrella term to cover all packets and networking operations that include the use of the Internet Protocol See also TCP IP IP address IP host address IP network address See internet address IP broadcast See broadcast IP tunneling See AURP IPX Internet Package Exchange A protocol used by Novell Netware networks ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network A method of transmitting data digitally over telephone lines ISP Internet service provider A company that provides Internet related services Most importantly an ISP provides Internet access services and products to other companies and consumers ITU International Telecommunication Union United Nations specialized agen
183. ion that surrounds the actual data being transmitted In e mail a header is usually the address and routing information found at the top of messages hop A single traverse from one node to another on a LAN hop count The number of nodes routers or other devices a packet has gone through If there are six routers between source and destination nodes the hop count for the packet will be six when it arrives at its destination node The maximum allowable hop count is usually 15 hop count reduction A feature of AURP supported by the Netopia ISDN Router Tunnels and point to point links over WANs can often exceed the maximum allowable hop count of 15 routers Network administrators can use the hop count reduction feature to set up tunnels and point to point links that exceed the 15 router limit host A single addressable device on a network Computers networked printers and routers are hosts Host Computer A communications device that enables users to run applications programs to perform such functions as text editing program execution access to data bases etc 4 User s Reference Guide internet A set of networks connected together by routers This is a general term not to be confused with the large multi organizational collection of IP networks known as the Internet An internet is sometimes also known as an internetwork internet address IP address Any computing device that uses the Internet Protocol IP must be assigned an
184. irectory on the CD and locate the Sds15000 exe program This is the Syslog daemon installer Run the Sds15000 exe program and follow the on screen instructions for enabling the Windows Syslog daemon When using syslog with a switched connection if the host you are logging into is located on the WAN the act of tearing down the call generates WAN events This requires the torn down line to come back up effectively making a call that will go up and down continuously This will only occur when the router tears down the call If the call is cleared remotely the redial restriction takes precedence and the packets are transparently aged out of the queue WAN and System Configuration 8 15 The following screen shows a sample syslog dump of WAN events tsnext farallon com Link 1 down PPP PAP failure tsnext farallon com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext farallon com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 tsnext farallon com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 tsnext farallon com Link 1 down Manual disconnect tsnext farallon com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext farallon com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 Nov tsnext farallon com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 Nov tsnext farallon Link 1 down No answer Nov 3 10 14 06 tsnext farallon com Device restarted Nov tsnext farallon com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN not supplied Nov B tsnext
185. ismiss the dialog box To clear the Device Event History select Clear Device Event History in the Event Histories screen and press Return Routing Tables You can view all of the IP IPX and AppleTalk routes in the Netopia R2121 s IP IPX and AppleTalk routing tables respectively To go to a Routing Table screen select the Routing Table you are interested in from the Statistics amp Logs screen Each of the routing table screens represents a snapshot of the routing table information at the time the screen is first invoked To take a new snapshot select Update at the bottom of the screen and press Return Statistics amp Logs WAN Event History Device Event History IP Routing Table IPX Routing Table IPX SAP Bindery Table AppleTalk Routing Table Served IP Addresses General Statistics System Information Monitoring Tools 13 9 IP routing table The IP routing table displays all of the IP routes currently known to the Netopia R2121 To display the IP Routing Table screen select IP Routing Table in the Statistics amp Logs screen and press Return IP Routing Table Network SCROLL UP 0 0 0 0 255 255 127 0 0 1 Loopback 255 240 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 255 255 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 255 255 192 168 1 Ethernet 0 0 0 0 OrRPRPREH cee HHO uo 224 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 SCROLL UPDATE IPX routing table The IPX routing table displays
186. itional Connection Profiles and configuring or reconfiguring the manner in which you may be 6 2 User s Reference Guide using the router to connect to more than one service provider or remote site The System Configuration menus display and permit changing m Network Protocols Setup See IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 m Filter Sets Firewalls See Security on page 14 1 m P Address Serving See IP address serving on page 10 16 m Date and Time See Date and Time on page 8 11 m Console Configuration See Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 m SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP on page 13 13 m Security See Security on page 14 1 m Upgrade Feature Set See Upgrade Feature Set on page 8 13 m Logging See Logging on page 8 13 The Utilities amp Diagnostics menus provide a selection of seven tools for monitoring and diagnosing the router s behavior as well as updating the firmware and rebooting the system See Utilities and Diagnostics on page 15 1 for detailed information The Statistics amp Logs menus display nine sets of tables and device logs that show information about your router your network and their history See Statistics amp Logs on page 13 for detailed information The Quick Menus screen is a shortcut entry point to twenty two of the most commonly used configuration menus
187. ive you Asynchronous PPP dial in support on the Auxiliary port on any router including leased line Netopia routers Understanding IP Addressing C 9 In any situation where a device is dialing into a Netopia router the router may need to be configured to serve IP via the WAN interface This is only a requirement if the calling device has not been configured locally to know what its address es are So when a client dialing into a Netopia router s WAN interface is expecting addresses to be served by the answering router you must set the answering Netopia router to serve IP via its WAN interface You can do this in either of two ways use the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients option in the Address Serving Setup screen Serve Dynamic WAN Clients enabled only allows you to specify a pool of addresses from which the dial in client may get an IP address It does not allow static addressing If you want to serve addresses dynamically use Serve Dynamic WAN Clients define the address that you want to serve in the Connection Profile s IP Setup screen This method requires a static value to be used Thus any user dialing in can obtain the same IP address for every connection to the profile If you want to serve addresses statically define the address in the Connection Profile Notes m The addresses that are to be served cannot be used elsewhere For example you wouldn t want to define a static address in a Connection Profile to be served via the WAN th
188. k numbers used by that router for that EtherTalk network Otherwise your EtherTalk network may experience routing conflicts The Netopia R2121 supports creating up to 32 zone names As an alternative you can set EtherTalk seeding to soft seeding and let the Netopia R2121 receive the zone name and network number from the other router m To remove zones from the list select Delete Zone Name and press Return to see the zones list Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select the zone to delete Press the Return key to delete it and exit the list Press the Escape key to exit the list without deleting any zones m Select Set Default Zone to choose a different default zone This is the zone where the Netopia R2121 s AppleTalk Setup 12 7 EtherTalk Phase II port is visible to other AppleTalk nodes The default zone is also where new AppleTalk nodes will appear If you do not set a default zone the first zone you create will be the default zone You can also set the range of EtherTalk Phase II network numbers Select Net Low and enter the lower limit of the network number range Select Net High and enter the upper limit of the range Select the Seeding pop up menu and choose the seeding method for the Netopia R2121 to use see Routers and seeding on page 12 3 You have finished configuring EtherTalk Phase Il LocalTalk Setup Note For instructions on making the physical connections for LocalTalk see Connecting to a LocalTalk network
189. kets matching the filter s criteria will be discarded Select Source IP Address and enter the source IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet ora host address Select Source IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the source IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on the source address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on all source IP addresses or enter 255 255 255 255 to match the source IP address exclusively Select Dest IP Address and enter the destination IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet or a host address Select Dest IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the destination IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on the destination address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on all destination IP addresses Select Protocol Type and enter ICMP TCP UDP Any or the number of another IP transport protocol see the table on page 14 9 Note If Protocol Type is set to TCP or UDP the settings for port comparison that you configure in steps 8 and 9 will appear These settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP Select Source Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet s source port number Then select Source Port ID and enter the actual source port number to match on see the table on page 14 8 Select Dest Port Compare and choose a comparison method for t
190. kets to different processes within a single node Novell has reserved several sockets for use in the NetWare environment Field Value Packet Type Description 00h Unknown Packet Type Used for all packets not clas sified by any other type 01h Routing Information Packet Unused for RIP packets 04h Service Advertising Packet Used for SAP packets 05h Sequenced Packet Used for SPX packets 11h NetWare Core Protocol Packet Used for NCP packets 14h Propagated Packet Used for Novell NetBIOS Routing Information Protocol RIP RIP which was also derived from XNS is a protocol that allows for the bidirectional transfer of routing tables and provides timing information ticks so that the fastest route to a destination can be determined IPX routers use RIP to create and dynamically maintain databases of internetwork routing information See the last section in this chapter for more information on routing tables Service Advertising Protocol SAP SAP is a protocol that provides servers and routers with a method to exchange service information Using SAP servers advertise their services and addresses Routers collect this information to dynamically update their routing tables and share it with other routers These broadcasts keep all routers on the internetwork synchronized and provide real time information on accessible servers on the internetwork IPX Setup 11 3 The following is a list of common SAP server types
191. kets to the remote router Neither router has a WAN IP address or subnet mask associated with this connection Note If your ISP has not given you their IP or subnet mask addresses then you may enter an IP address such as 127 0 0 2 and an IP subnet mask such as 255 0 0 0 With these settings the router will get this information dynamically when it connects to the remote site 4 If your ISP uses unnumbered system based routing select Remote IP Address and enter the IP address your ISP gave you Then select Remote IP Mask and enter the IP subnet mask of the remote site you will connect to 5 Select the PPP Authentication pop up menu and choose the type of connection security your ISP told you to use PAP CHAP PAP TOKEN or CACHE TOKEN If you choose any of these authentication methods go to the next step If your ISP does not use any of these authentication methods choose None and skip to the last step When you create a connection profile from Easy Setup the default setting is PAP 6 If your ISP uses PAP or PAP TOKEN select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect If you selected PAP select Send Password and enter your password If you selected PAP TOKEN you don t enter the password now Your name and password can be up to 32 characters each If your ISP uses CHAP select Send Host Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect Then select Send Secret and enter the secret CHAP term for password
192. le the name of your ISP 2 Toggle the Profile Enabled value to Yes or No The default is Yes 3 Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears Address Translation Enabled IP Profile Local WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set Receive RIP WAN and System Configuration 8 3 Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here 4 Toggle or enter any IP Parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape For more information see IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 5 If you will be connecting with an IPX remote network toggle IPX Enabled to Yes and press Return Otherwise accept the default No If you enable IPX routing an IPX Profile Parameters menu item becomes available Select IPX Profile Parameters and press Return The IPX Profile Parameters screen appears IPX Profile Parameters Remote IPX Network Path Delay NetBios Packet Forwarding Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Periodic Periodic Packet Filter Set Packet Filter Set SAP Filter Set SAP Filter Set RIP Timer SAP Timer 00000000 10 off lt lt NONE gt gt lt lt NONE gt gt lt lt NONE gt gt lt lt NONE gt gt Configure IPX requirements for a remote network connection here
193. le tells the filter set what to do with a packet that does not match any of the filter rules An example of implied rules is as follows Implied Meaning Y Y Y N If all filter rules are YES the implied is NO N N N Y If all filter rules are NO the implied is YES Y N Y N If a mix of YES and NO filters the implied is NO Security 14 33 Established Connections The TCP header contains one bit called the ACK Bit or TCP Ack bit This ACK Bit only appears with TCP not UDP The ACK bit is part of the TCP mechanism that guaranteed the delivery of data The ACK bit is set whenever one side of a connection has received data from the other side Only the first TCP packet will not have the ACK bit set once the TCP connection is in place the remainder of the TCP packets with have the ACK bit set The ACK bit is helpful for firewall design and reduces the number of potential filter rules A filter rule could be created just allowing incoming TCP packets with the ACK bit set as these packets had to be originated from the local network Example IP Filter Set Screen This is an example of the Netopia IP filter set screen Change Filter Enabled Yes Forward No Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type TCP Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare Equal Dest Port ID 2000 Established TCP Conns Only No Return En
194. led with the operating system m If you connect a Macintosh computer you can use the ZTerm terminal emulation program on the supplied Netopia R2121 CD 6 4 User s Reference Guide Launch your terminal emulation software and configure the communications software for the following values These are the default communication parameters that the Netopia R2121 uses Parameter Suggested Value Terminal type PC ANSI BBS Mac ANSI VT 100 or VT 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Speed Options are 9600 19200 38400 or 57600 bits per second Flow Control None Note The router firmware contains an autobaud detection feature If you are at any screen on the serial console you can change your baud rate and press Return HyperTerminal for the PC requires a disconnect The new baud rate is displayed at the bottom of the screen Navigating through the console screens Use your keyboard to navigate the Netopia R2121 s configuration screens enter and edit information and make choices The following table lists the keys to use to navigate through the console screens To Use These Keys Move through selectable items in a screen or pop up menu Up Down Left and Right Arrow To set a change to a selected item or open a pop up menu of Return or Enter options for a selected item like entering an upgrade key Change a toggle value Yes No On Off Tab Restore an entry or toggle value to its pr
195. led Filter Set 1 the next filter will be Filter Set 2 and so on To give a new filter set a different name select Filter Set Name and enter a new name for the filter set To save the filter set select ADD FILTER SET The saved filter set is empty contains no filters but you can return to it later to add filters see Modifying filter sets on page 14 18 Or you can add filters to your new set before saving it see Adding filters to a filter set on page 14 15 Select CANCEL to leave the Add Filter Set screen without saving the new filter set and return to the Filter Sets screen Security 14 15 Input and output filters source and destination There are two kinds of filters you can add to a filter set input and output Input filters check packets received from the Internet destined for your network Output filters check packets transmitted from your network to the Internet packet input filter WAN e p LAN packet output filter The Netopia R series Router Packets in the Netopia R2121 pass through an input filter if they originate in the WAN and through an output filter if they re being sent out to the WAN The process for adding input and output filters is exactly the same The main difference between the two involves their reference to source and destination From the perspective of an input filter your local network is the destination of the packets it checks and the remo
196. ll see the following dialog box Are you sure you want to read the firmware now The device will reset when the transfer is complete CONTINUE m Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new firmware into effect While the system resets the LEDs will blink on and off Caution m Be sure the firmware update you load onto your router is the correct version for your particular model Some models do not support all firmware versions Loading an incorrect firmware version can permanently damage the unit m Do not manually power down or reset the Netopia R2121 while it is automatically resetting or it could be damaged m f you choose to download the firmware the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Firmware The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Downloading configuration files The Router can be configured by downloading a configuration file using TFTP Once downloaded the file reconfigures all of the Router s parameters as if someone had manually done so through the console port To download a configuration file follow these steps Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located Select Config File Name and enter the name of th
197. ll show up on side B and only those machines or services in the Free Trade Zone will be accessible to side B All of side A will be able to see all of side B Adding an AURP partner m To add a new AURP partner select Add Partner and press Return to go to the Add AURP Partner screen Add AURP Partner Partner IP Address or Domain Name Initiate Connection Restrict to Free Trade Zone ADD PARTNER NOW Enter Information about new Partner m Select Partner IP Address or Domain Name and enter the new AURP partner s IP address If you do not know the remote network s IP address enter its domain name Domain names are the Internet addresses favored by people for example chagall arts edu Domain names are matched to the IP addresses actually used by IP routers for example 163 7 8 202 m To initiate a connection with an AURP partner select Initiate Connection and toggle it to Yes This will open a connection to the remote AppleTalk network after rebooting m You can choose to restrict this partner to the Free Trade Zone by toggling Restrict to Free Trade Zone to Yes See AURP Free Trade Zone on page 12 8 for more information m To add the new AURP partner select ADD PARTNER NOW To discard the new AURP partner select CANCEL Modifying an AURP partner m To modify an AURP partner select Display Change Partner in the AURP Setup screen and press Return to display a table of existing partners Use the Up and Down A
198. lly to the protocols or rule sets that govern this communication AppleTalk address A unique identifier for each device using AppleTalk that allows information to be sent and received correctly An AppleTalk address always includes a network number wherever two or more AppleTalk networks are connected together by routers AURP Apple Update based Router Protocol An enhanced AppleTalk routing protocol AURP provides improved support for AppleTalk over wide area networks WANs and tunneling through non AppleTalk IP networks AURP features include network number remapping clustering of remote network numbers and hop count reduction backbone A network topology consisting of a single length of cable with multiple network connection points Bandwidth The range of frequencies expressed in Kilobits per second that can pass over a given data transmission channel within a network The bandwidth determines the rate at which information can be sent through a channel the greater the bandwidth the more information that can be sent in a given amount of time BAP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol Manages the dynamic bandwidth allocation of implementations supporting the PPP multilink protocol This is done by defining the Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP as well as its associated control protocol the Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol BACP BAP can be used to manage the number of links in a multilink bundle baud rate The rate of the sign
199. ls that make up an IP packet travelling over Ethernet By default the Netopia R2121 uses Ethernet packet headers for IP traffic If your network requires 802 3 IP framing you must configure this through SNMP C 14 User s Reference Guide Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior D 1 Appendix D Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior This appendix describes how Network Address Translation works within the Netopia R2121 The Netopia R2121 implements a powerful feature called Network Address Translation NAT as specified in RFC 1631 NAT is used for IP address conservation and for security purposes since there will only be a single IP presence on the WAN This appendix describes the NAT functionality within the Netopia R2121 and provides examples for setup and use Network Configuration Below is a diagram of the network referenced in this appendix ISP Network Customer Site IP 200 1 1 1 Netopia Router Netopia Router Mask 255 255 255 0 Mask 255 255 255 240 MAC 00 00 c5 60 21 O0a MAC 00 00 c5 60 21 0a Router Workstation A IP 192 168 5 2 Mask 255 255 255 240 Internet MAC 00 05 02 04 12 4f WWW Server Workstation B IP 163 176 4 32 IP 192 168 5 3 Mask 255 255 255 0 Mask 255 255 255 240 MAC 00 05 02 0c 1b 41 MAC 00 05 02 00 1e 03 Background NAT is a mechanism employed within the Netopia R2121 to acquire a statically or dynamically assigned IP address on its WAN interface and proxy against locally assigned IP
200. lter 1 No Filter 2 No lt lt NO MATCH gt gt Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here Select a filter and toggle the packet forwarding action to Yes pass or No discard 14 26 User s Reference Guide 3 To add a filter to the filter set select Append Filter to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to add it to the filter set The default action of newly added filters is to not forward packets that match their criteria To exit the table without adding the filter press the Escape key 4 To remove a filter from the filter set select Detach Filter to display a table of appended filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to remove it from the set To exit the table without removing the filter press the Escape key 5 Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set Select CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter Set screen without saving the new filter set Deleting a packet filter set To delete a packet filter set select Delete IPX Packet Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set Note Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set However the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect unless they are part of another set The deleted set will no
201. lter priority Continuing the customs inspectors analogy imagine the inspectors lined up to examine a package If the package matches the first inspector s criteria the package is either rejected or passed on to its destination depending on the first inspector s particular orders In this case the package is never seen by the remaining inspectors 14 6 User s Reference Guide packet first filter send to next filter pass or discard discard delete to network If the package does not match the first inspector s criteria it goes to the second inspector and so on You can see that the order of the inspectors in the line is very important For example let s say the first inspector s orders are to send along all packages that come from Rome and the second inspector s orders are to reject all packages that come from France If a package arrives from Rome the first inspector sends it along without allowing the second inspector to see it A package from Paris is ignored by the first inspector rejected by the second inspector and never seen by the others A package from London is ignored by the first two inspectors and so it s seen by the third inspector In the same way filter sets apply their filters in a particular order The first filter applied can pass or discard a packet before that packet ever reaches any of the other filters If the first filter can neither pass nor discard the packet beca
202. ly issue an IP address when they are contracted to provide Internet access services The InterNIC the NIC stands for Network Information Center divides IP addresses into several classes Classes A B and C are assigned to organizations who request addresses In Class A networks the first byte of an IP address is reserved for the network portion of the address Class B networks reserve the first two bytes of an IP address for the network address Class C networks reserve the first three bytes of an IP address for the network address In all cases a network manager can decide to use subnetting to assign even more bits to the network portion of the IP address but never less than the class requires The following section gives more information on subnetting Class A networks have a small number of possible network numbers but a large number of possible host numbers Conversely Class C networks have a small number of possible host numbers but a large number of possible network numbers Thus the InterNIC assigns Class A addresses to large organizations that have very large numbers of IP hosts while smaller organizations with fewer hosts get Class B or Class C addresses You can tell the various classes apart by the value of the first or high order byte Class A networks use values from 1 to 127 Class B networks use values from 128 to 191 and Class C networks use values from 192 to 223 The following table summarizes some of the differences betwee
203. m Finding an Internet service provider on page B 1 m Deciding on an ISP account on page B 2 m Obtaining information from the ISP on page B 3 Note Some companies act as their own ISP For example some organizations have branch offices that can use the Netopia R2121 to access the Internet via the main office in a point to point scenario If you install the Netopia R2121 in this type of environment refer to the following sections for specific information you must receive from the network administrator to configure the Netopia R2121 properly Finding an Internet service provider During the setup session the SmartStart setup application will provide you with a list of service providers who support the Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog You can register with one of these ISPs as part of setting up your router If you have purchased your Netopia R2121 through a Netopia ISP partner you may have received a customized configuration file from the ISP that will allow you to make an immediate connection when you run SmartStart Internet access is available from other Internet service providers Typically there are several ISPs in each area To locate ISPs in your area consult your telephone book local computer magazines the business section of a local newspaper or the following URL on the Internet http thelist internet com Also see Netopia s home page at http www netopia com for a list of ISPs with special programs
204. menda tions for international communications See also ANS American National Standards Institute CHAP challenge handshake protocol A method for ensuring secure network access and communications Class A B and C networks The values assigned to the first few bits in an IP network address determine which class designation the network has In decimal notation Class A network addresses range from 1 X X X to 126 X X X Class B network addresses range from 128 1 X X to 191 254 X X and Class C addresses range from 192 0 1 X to 223 255 254 X For more information on IP network address classes see Appendix C Understanding IP Addressing client An intelligent workstation that makes requests to other computers known as servers PC computers on a LAN can be clients clustering A feature that clusters remapped network numbers into a range of sequential network numbers CNA Calling Number Authentication A security feature that will reject an incoming call if it does not match the Calling Number field in one of the Netopia ISDN Router s Connection Profiles CND Calling Number Delivery Also known as caller ID a feature that allows the Called Customer Premises Equipment CPE to receive a calling party s directory number during the call establishment phase community strings Sequences of characters that serve much like passwords for devices using SNMP Different community strings may be used to allow an SNMP user to gather device i
205. mon use designated as Phase and Phase II EtherTalk extended network A network using AppleTalk Phase II protocols EtherTalk 2 0 and TokenTalk are extended networks LocalTalk networks are compatible with Phase II but are not extended because a single LocalTalk network cannot have multiple network numbers or multiple zone names firmware System software stored in a device s memory that controls the device The Netopia ISDN Router s firmware can be updated gateway A device that connects two or more networks that use different protocols Gateways provide address translation services but do not translate data Gateways must be used in conjunction with special software packages that allow computers to use networking protocols not originally designed for them hard seeding A router setting In hard seeding if a router that has just been reset detects a network number or zone name conflict between its configured information and the information provided by another router it disables the router port for which there is a conflict See also non seeding seeding seed router and soft seeding HDLC High Level Data Link Control A generic linktevel communications protocol developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO HDLC manages synchronous code transparent serial information transfer over a link connection See also SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control header In packets a header is part of the envelope informat
206. ms with devices on the Internet attempting to access services like WWW and FTP servers or AURP partners on the Netopia R2121 s local LAN interface In this case if a dynamic IP address is assigned to the WAN interface of the Netopia R2121 each time the administrator of the Netopia R2121 will have to notify clients wishing to access services on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface of the new IP address after each connection With NAT enabled there cannot be two or more of the same types of service accessible from the Internet on the LAN interface of the Netopia R2121 For example there cannot be multiple FTP servers Port 23 on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface that can be accessible by workstations on the Internet This is due to the fact that within the Netopia R2121 and IP there is no way to distinguish between multiple servers using the same port in this case port 23 Fictional IP addresses may be assigned on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface It is strongly recommended that for the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface an IP address from the Class C address range of 192 168 X X be used This is because this range is defined by the IANA as an address space that will never be routed through the Internet and is to be used by private Intranets not attached to the Internet If the address range of 192 168 X X is not used and another range of addresses such as 100 1 1 X is used instead this address space can potentially overlap an address space that is own
207. n Y The letter Y means the LED is yellow The section Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Status Lights on page 2 6 describes the meanings of the colors for each LED 13 4 User s Reference Guide Statistics amp Logs en Statistics amp Logs General Statistics When you are troubleshooting your Netopia R2121 the Statistics screens provide insight into the recent event activities of the Router From the Main Menu go to Statistics amp Logs and select one of the options described in the sections below General Statistics To go to the General Statistics screen select General Statistics in the Statistics amp Logs screen General Statistics General Statistics screen General Statistics Physical I F Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err Ethernet Hub 4404 20958 60 375 0 LocalTalk 0 13294 0 754 0 0 56K Modem 1 0 0 0 0 0 842 56K Modem 2 5 0 4 0 0 842 Network Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err 2 2 0 0 IP 656 1152 AppleTalk 0 23046 0 1115 General Statistics displays information about data traffic on the Netopia R2121 s data ports This information is useful for monitoring and troubleshooting your LAN The left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted for the following protocols m IP IP packets on the Ethernet m PX IPX packets on the Ethernet if IPX is enabled m ET II Ap
208. n Class A B and C networks Number of Number of clasg j PIGE DYyIE B M a a a ExaMple class network A 1 127 127 16 777 214 net host host host 97 3 14 250 128 191 16 384 65 534 net net host host 140 100 10 11 C 192 223 2 097 152 254 net net net host 197 204 13 7 Subnets and subnet masks Often an entire organization is assigned only one IP network number If the organization has several IP networks connected together with IP routers the network manager can use subnetting to distinguish between these networks even though they all use the same network number Each physical network becomes a subnet with a unique subnet number Subnet numbers appear within IP addresses along with network numbers and host numbers Since an IP address is always 32 bits long using subnet numbers means either the network number or the host numbers must use fewer bits in order to leave room for the subnet numbers Since the InterNIC assigns the network number proper it should not change so the subnet numbers must be created out of bits that would otherwise be part of the host numbers Understanding IP Addressing C 3 Subnet masks To create subnets the network manager must define a subnet mask a 32 bit number that indicates which bits in an IP address are used for network and subnetwork addresses and which are used for host addresses One subnet mask should apply to all IP networks that are physically connected together and sh
209. n because of the inherent noise it contributes Today s telephone network is increasingly digital In particular the portion of the phone connection between the phone company and the Internet Service Provider ISP is often digital Digital lines still have noise and are still subject to Shannon s limit but they have less noise and a higher ceiling Several companies have created techniques that take advantage of the digital portion of the phone network to achieve higher speeds than were possible with a purely analog pathway H 2 User s Reference Guide These new techniques treat the phone system as a mostly digital network that just happens to have an analog portion There are several consequences to the reliance on a half digital connection Your Internet Service Provider must have digital phone lines to the public switched telephone network PSTN That s the easy part if your ISP offers 56Kbps they have the digital lines Getting the most out of 56K technology requires that you have optimal conditions on your telephone line Any noise in the line will degrade your connection Statistics show that most people connect somewhere between 45 and 50K Many connect at 52K Connect rates between 40 and 50K are in no way a failure on the part of the Internet Service Provider but simply a fact of life in trying to extend the limitations of noisy analog telephone lines The Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog ships with the unified ITU V 90 standard fi
210. n is assumed to be None even if you ve set it to PAP or CHAP The answer profile uses the caller s IP address to match a connection profile However the answer profile cannot discover a caller s subnet mask it assumes that the caller is not subnetting its IP address Class A addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255 0 0 0 Class B addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255 255 0 0 Class C addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255 255 255 0 Class C address ranges are generally the most common subnet allocated If a remote network has a non standard mask that is it uses subnetting the only way for it to successfully connect to the Netopia Router is by matching a connection profile In other words you will have to set up a connection profile for that network If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No you can also set the following parameters for accepted calls that do not match a connection profile Managing Voice and Data Calls 9 7 Call acceptance scenarios The following are a few common call acceptance scenarios and information on how to configure the Netopia R2121 for those purposes To accept all calls regardless of whether they match a connection profile m Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No To only accept calls that match a connection profile through use of a name and password or secret m Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes and m Set Authentication to PAP or CHAP Note The authentication method yo
211. n restart This dynamic node addressing scheme prevents conflicts when devices are moved between networks and simplifies the administrative tasks of a network If you have only one network the node address alone is all the information AppleTalk needs to send a packet from one computer to another However networks can be connected together through routers such as the Netopia R2121 into an internetwork often shortened to internet Because devices on different networks can have duplicate node numbers AppleTalk tells them apart according to an additional part of their addresses the network number The Netopia R2121 assigns a unique network number to each member network In terms of the city street metaphor the network number is similar to the name of the street Putting a network number together with a node number fully specifies the address of a node on an internet To make the services on an internet manageable groups of devices on a network can be grouped into zones When this is done selecting a network service Server etc includes choosing a zone from which the service can be selected Like network numbers zone names are assigned by routers A routing table is maintained by each AppleTalk router The table serves as a map of the internet specifying the path and distance in hops between its router and other networks The routing table is used to determine whether a router will forward a data packet and if so to which network You c
212. n the Internet Workstation A forms an IP packet with the source IP address of 192 168 5 2 and destination IP address of 163 176 4 32 and source port could be 400 while the destination port would be 80 WWW server Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior D 3 When the Netopia R2121 receives this IP packet it can not simply forward it to the WAN interface and the Internet since the IP addresses on the LAN interface are not valid or globally unique for the Internet Instead the Netopia R2121 has to change the IP packet to reflect the IP address that was acquired on the WAN interface from the ISP The Netopia R2121 will first substitute the source IP address with the IP address that was acquired on the WAN interface which in this case is 200 1 1 40 Next the Netopia R2121 will substitute the source TCP or UDP port with a TCP or UDP port from within a specified range maintained within the Netopia R2121 And finally the modified IP packet s checksum is recalculated as specified in RFC 1631 and the packet is transmitted across the WAN interface to its destination the WWW Server on the Internet If the send and response IP packets were drawn out this process would look like the following Netopia Router WWW Server ISP Router LAN 192 168 5 1 Workstation A 103 LON oe 200 1 1 1 WAN 200 1 1 40 192 168 5 2 Netopia to ISP Router Wkstn A to Netopia Src IP 200 1 1 40 Src IP 192 168 5 2 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Dst IP 163 176 4 32 Src Port 5001 Src Port
213. nation port of 5001 the Netopia R2121 can see that this packet s destination on the local LAN interface is actually Workstation A at IP address 192 168 5 2 Likewise with the response for port 5002 the Netopia R2121 can see that this packet s destination on the local LAN interface is actually Workstation B at IP address 192 168 5 3 Exported services Note that this automatic port remapping and IP address substitution only works in one direction for IP packets that originated on the LAN interface destined to the WAN interface and the Internet In order for port remapping and IP address substitution to work in the other direction that is hosts on the Internet wishing to originate an IP packet destined to a host on the Netopia R2121s LAN interface a manual redirection of TCP or UDP ports as well as destination IP addresses within the Netopia R2121 is required This manual port remapping and IP address substitution is accomplished by setting up Exported Services Exported Services are essentially user defined pointers for a particular type of incoming TCP or UDP service from the WAN interface to a host on the local LAN interface This is necessary since the Netopia R2121 and thus the attached local LAN has only one IP presence on the WAN interface and Internet Exported Services allows the user to redirect one type of service for example Port 21 FTP to a single host on the local LAN interface This will then allow the Netopia R2121 to redirect
214. ncels Set up configuration access options here Protecting the Security Options screen The first screen you should protect is the Security Options screen because it controls access to the configuration screens Access to the Security Options screen can be protected with a password Select Password for This Screen in the Security Options screen and enter a password Make sure this password is secure and is different from any of the user account passwords Protecting the configuration screens You can protect the configuration screens with user accounts You can administer the accounts from the Security Options screen You can create up to four accounts Security 14 3 To display a view only list of user accounts select Show Users in the Security Options screen To add a new user account select Add User in the Security Options screen and press Return to go to the Add Name With Write Access screen Add Name With Write Access Enter Name Enter Password 11 characters max ADD NAME PASSWORD NOW Follow these steps to configure the new account 1 Select Enter Name and enter a descriptive name for example the user s first name 2 Select Enter Password and enter a password 3 To accept the new name password combination select ADD NAME PASSWORD NOW To exit the Add Name With Write Access screen without saving the new account select CANCEL To delete a user account select Delete User to display a list of accounts Sele
215. ncoming IP packet has a source IP address that matches the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia R2121 This will NOT forward this packet Example 2 Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 IP Address Binary Representation 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Perform the logical AND 10000000 Logical AND result This incoming IP packet 10000000 has a source IP address that does not match the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia R2121 This rule WILL forward this packet because the packet does not match Example 3 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 IP Address Binary Representation 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND 10110000 Logical AND result 14 36 User s Reference Guide Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2121 is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 1011000 this rule does NOT match and this packet will be p
216. nection screen to continue Set Once Only Schedule If you set How Often to Once Only select Set Once Only Schedule and go to the Set Once Only Schedule screen Set Once Only Schedule Place Call on MM DD YY 05 07 1998 Scheduled Window Start Time 11 50 AM or PM AM Scheduled Window Duration 00 00 m Select Place Call On Date and enter a date in the format MM DD YY or MM DD YYYY month day year Note You must enter the date in the format specified The slashes are mandatory For example the entry 5 7 98 would be accepted as May 7 1998 The entry 5 7 would be rejected m Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection Note You must enter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected m Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM m Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled 9 12 User s Reference Guide connection Use the same format restrictions noted above You are finished configuring the once only options Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue m Inthe Add Scheduled Connection screen
217. nections This is commonly called firewalling your network Before creating filter sets you should read the next few sections to learn more about how these powerful security tools work What s a filter and what s a filter set A filter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can flow in and out of your network A particular filter can either be an input filter one that is used on data packets coming in to your network from the Internet or an output filter one that is used on data packets going out from your network to the Internet A filter set is a group of filters that work together to check incoming or outgoing data A filter set can consist of a combination of input and output filters Security 14 5 How filter sets work A filter set acts like a team of customs inspectors Each filter is an inspector through which incoming and outgoing packages must pass The inspectors work as a team but each inspects every package individually Each inspector has a specific task One inspector s task may be to examine the destination address of all outgoing packages That inspector looks for a certain destination which could be as specific as a street address or as broad as an entire country and checks each package s destination address to see if it matches that destination A filter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages Fi
218. nections an 8 port 10Base T Ethernet hub for your LAN connection a DE 9 Console port and an HD 15 Auxiliary port that can be used as either a serial or LocalTalk port 56K Modem Specifications complies with ITU T V 90 and or K56flex standard Power requirements m 12 VDC input m 1 5 Amps Environment Operating temperature 0 to 40 C Storage temperature 0 to 70 C Relative storage humidity 20 to 80 non condensing Technical Specifications and Safety Information G 3 Software and protocols Software media Software preloaded on internal flash memory field upgrades done via download to internal flash memory via XMODEM or TFTP Routing TCP IP Internet Protocol Suite RIP AppleTalk LocalTalkto Ethernet routing AURP tunneling MaclP IPX optional add on feature WAN support PPP MP HDLC Security PAP CHAP PAP TOKEN CACHE TOKEN callback SecurlD IP IPX firewalls UI password security and CallerlD SNMP network management SNMPv1 MIB II RFC 1213 Interface MIB RFC 1229 Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 AppleTalk MIB 1243 Netopia R2121 MIB Management configuration methods HTTP web server serial console remote modem console telnet SNMP Diagnostics PING event logging routing table displays traceroute statistics counters Call Accounting Agency approvals The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router has met the safety standards per CSA 950 of the Canadian Standards Association for Canada
219. nesilassutceuasewea tla tualaeicwetilas tad 3 9 ii User s Reference Guide Configuring TCP IP on Windows 95 98 or NT COURS oiii aaia 3 9 Configuring TCP IP on Macintosh computers 3 13 Chapter 4 Monitoring with SmartView eccerre 4 1 Smar EW MURINE niana ea 4 1 Navigating S mae WN iiien 4 2 General Machine Information page s c 4 2 Connection Profiles PAGE sccsceciiassieseissstesrticrseactaaens 4 3 Event AIStOry POURS oorden irdi a arin 4 3 Standard HTML Web based monitoring pages 45 Chapter 5 Connecting Your Local Area Network seee 5 1 IRA Sexes custo te toes ache eins cid tutes wes alnianeantensss 5 1 Readying computers on your local NetWork 5 1 Connecting to an Ethernet network esere 5 3 TBS E cninn 54 Adding a mira modei ran 5 5 Connecting to a LocalTalk NetWork srscsrissirriisniertescrsss 5 6 Wiring guidelines for PhoneNET cabling 5 7 Part Il Advanced Configuration Chapter 6 Console based Management eee 6 1 Connecting through a Telnet session 6 2 Configuring Telnet SoftWare cccceeceeeseeseeeerseeeess 6 3 Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router 6 3 Navigating through the console screens ccce 64 Chapter 7 Easy Setup oo ene 7 1 Easy Setup Console SCreeNns scere 7 1 How to access the Easy Setup console screens 7 1 Beginning EASY SQUID ccscccricctcsnasinceiartendiar narsiieeuuien 73 Easy Setup PONE sariei ea 7 3 FESI E rE TA 74 Con
220. nformation or change device configurations CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check A computational means to ensure the integrity of a block of data The mathematical function is computed before the data is transmitted at the originating device Its numerical value is computed based on the content of the data This value is compared with a recomputed value of the function at the destination device DCE Data Communications Equipment Term defined by standards committees that applies to communications equipment typically modems or printers as distinct from other devices that attach to the network typically personal computers or data terminals DTE The distinction generally refers to which pins in an RS 232 C connection transmit or receive data Also see DTE DDP Datagram Delivery Protocol Defines socket to socket delivery of datagrams over an AppleTalk internet DTE Data Terminal Equipment Term defined by standards committees that applies to communications equipment typically personal computers or data terminals as distinct from other devices that attach to the network typically modems or printers DCE The distinction generally refers to which pins in an RS 232 C connection transmit or receive data Pins 2 and 3 are reversed Also see DCE default zone When a Phase II EtherTalk network includes more than one zone all routers on that network must be configured to assign one of these zones as a default zone The default zone is temporarily
221. ng distance calls Endorsements Consider recommendations from colleagues and reviews in publications Netopia lists Netopia Certified ISPs on our web site at http www netopia com Deciding on an ISP account Your ISP may offer various Internet access account plans Typically these plans vary by usage charges and the number of host IP addresses supplied Evaluate your networking needs and discuss them with your ISP before deciding on a plan for your network The following checklist is a guide to ensure you obtain the Internet service you require Setting up a Netopia R2121 account Check whether your ISP has the Netopia R2121 ona list of supported products that have been tested with a particular configuration If the ISP does not have the Netopia R2121 on sucha list describe the Netopia R2121 in as much detail as needed so your ISP account can be optimized As appropriate you may refer your ISP to Netopia s web site for more information Obtaining an IP host address Typically each computer on the network that requires Internet access requires its own unique IP address If some or all network computers require simultaneous Internet access obtain a block of IP host addresses large enough for each computer to have its own address plus one for the Netopia R2121 Setting Up Internet Services B 3 Consider expected growth in your network when deciding on the number of addresses to obtain Alternatively you may use the Network
222. nmi EA feet ter nae select User Mode Choose Advanced and click OK a Or in the MacTCP window select Ethernet and click the T More button MacTcP Obtain Address p P Address mMangafg Class B Address 192 168 1 8 OC server Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 LocalTalk D Bun amie eilg I Node Net Subnet Bits 16 Net IP Address uting Gateway Address Net ispeom 192 168 110 3 Inthe TCP IP window or in the MacTCP More window select or type information into the fields as shown in the following table Option Select Type onnect via ernet Subnet mask Router address 192 168 1 1 Name server address Enter the primary and secondary name server addresses given to you by your ISP Implicit Search Path Enter your domain name if you do not have Starting domain name a domain name enter the domain name of your ISP 4 Close the TCP IP or MacTCP control panel and save the settings 5 If you are using MacTCP you must restart the computer If you are using Open Transport you do not need to restart These are the only fields you need to modify in this screen Note You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on you
223. ns below for ways to allow remote hosts to use services provided by servers on the LAN Possible modifications You can modify the sample filter set Basic Firewall to allow incoming traffic using the examples below These modifications are not intended to be combined Each modification is to be the only one used with Basic Firewall The results of combining filter set modifications can be difficult to predict It is recommended that you take special care if making more than one modification to the sample filter set Trusted host To allow unlimited access bya trusted remote host with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address a b c d m Source IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 m Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Protocol Type 0 Trusted subnet To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote subnet with subnet address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 0 and subnet mask e f g h corresponding to a numbered IP mask such as 255 255 255 0 insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address a b c d m Source IP Address Mask e f g h m Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Protocol Type 0 Security 14 21 FTP sessio
224. ns To allow WAN originated FTP sessions to a LAN based FTP server with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Source IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address a b c d m Dest IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 m Protocol Type TCP m Source Port Comparison No Compare m Source Port ID 0 m Dest Port Comparison Equal m Dest Port ID 21 Note A similar filter could be used to permit Telnet or WWW access Set the Dest Port ID to 23 for Telnet or 80 for WWW AURP tunnel To allow an AURP tunnel between a remote AURP router with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 and a local AURP router including the Netopia R2121 itself insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address a b c d m Source IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 m Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Protocol Type UDP m Source Port Comparison Equal m Source Port ID 387 m Dest Port Comparison Equal m Dest Port ID 387 14 22 User s Reference Guide IPX filters IPX Filters and Filter Sets Filter Sets Firewalls System Configuration Main p Menu IPX packet filters
225. ns your Netopia R2121 an IP address that external users use to communicate with your network The following Quick View screen shows an example where 192 163 100 6 is assigned to the calling Netopia R2121 NAT indicates that the address was assigned dynamically by Network Address Translation Quick View 11 16 1998 04 40 47 PM Default IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 CPU Load 10 Unused Memory 541 KB Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Call Acct Disabled Domain Name None Provided LocalTalk Address 34448 149 MAC Address IP Address IPX Address EtherTalk Ethernet Hub 00 00 c5 70 03 48 192 163 1 1 34449 150 Current WAN Connection Status Profile Name State Use Remote Address ISP Pl 10 IP 92 163 4 1 NAT 192 163 100 6 LED Status PWR MODEM1 CON AUX MODEM2 EN LEDS RNG DCD TX RX LNK LNK RNG DCD TX RX DATA Off G G E R Red Y Yellow IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 5 Internal users can access the Internet as they always do the external Internet however views all traffic from the internal network as originating from 192 163 100 6 Similarly all traffic your network receives is addressed to 192 163 100 6 Associating port numbers to nodes When an IP client such as a Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer wants to establish a session with an IP server such as a Web server the client machine must know the IP address to use and th
226. nt to telnet into and press Return m Either accept the default control character Q used to suspend the Telnet session or type a different one m START A TELNET SESSION becomes highlighted m Press Return and the Telnet session will be initiated m To suspend the session press Control Q or whatever other control character you specified Two new options will appear in the Telnet screen not shown Resume Suspended Session select this one if you want to go back to your Telnet session Terminate Suspended Session select this one if you want to end the session Secure Authentication Monitor Note The Secure Authentication Monitor field will remain hidden if PAP TOKEN or CACHE TOKEN is not the selected authentication method in the Connection Profile You use the Secure Authentication Monitor screen when placing one type of SecurlD connection call See Connecting using security authentication on page 14 39 for details Utilities and Diagnostics 15 7 Disconnect Telnet Console Session If you want to close your Telnet Console session select Disconnect Telnet Console Session and press Return A dialog box appears asking you to cancel or continue your selection Utilities amp Diagnostics Are you sure you want to close this Console Session CONTINUE X Modem File Transfer Revert to Factory Defaults Restart System If you select Continue you will immediately terminate your session Factory defaults You can r
227. o support these services with Network Address Translation enabled a service can only be associated with one machine on the LAN When connected to the Internet or some other large network using Network Address Translation the individual machines on your LAN are not directly accessible from the WAN Network Address Translation provides an inherently secure method of connection to the outside world IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 3 Using Network Address Translation The following procedure describes how to use Network Address Translation 1 Pick a network number for your local network referred to as the internal network This can be any IP address range you want The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router has a default IP address of 192 168 1 1 You may choose to change this address to match a pre existing addressing scheme For this example we will use 10 0 0 0 Note The outside world the external network will not see this network number Using the internal network number assign addresses to the local nodes on your LAN For example you may assign 10 0 0 1 to your Netopia R2121 10 0 0 2 to a node running as a World Wide Web server 10 0 0 3 to an FTP server 10 0 0 4 to a Windows NT PC 10 0 0 5 to a Windows 95 PC Note See Associating port numbers to nodes on page 10 5 You created a Connection Profile for your ISP when you ran the SmartStart application In the Connection Profile you can toggle Addre
228. of another set The deleted set will no longer appear in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was added 14 30 User s Reference Guide Firewall tutorial General Firewall Terms Firewall a component or set of components that restrict access between a protected network and the Internet or between two networks Host A workstation on the Network Packet Unit of communication on the Internet Packet Filter Packet filters allow or deny packets based on source or destination IP addresses TCP or UDP ports or the TCP ACK bit Port A number that defines a particular type of service Filter Rule A filter set is comprised of individual filter rules Filter Set A grouping of individual filter rules Basic IP Packet Components All IP packets contain the same basic header information as follows Source IP Address 163 176 132 18 Destination IP Address 163 176 4 27 Source Port 2541 Destination Port 80 Protocol TCP ACK Bit Yes DATA User Data This header information is what the packet filter uses to make filtering decisions It is important to note that a packet filter does not look into the IP datastream the User Data from above to make filtering decisions Basic Protocol Types TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP provides reliable packet delivery and has a retransmission mechanism so packets are not lost RFC 793 is the specification for TCP UDP User Datagram Protoc
229. of services can be redirected to a single or multiple hosts For example port 80 WWW Server could be redirected to 192 168 5 3 on the Netopia R2121 s LAN interface as well as port 23 Telnet can be redirected to that same host Summary NAT is a powerful feature of the Netopia R2121 and when used and set up properly can yield a secure network while only using one IP address on the WAN interface Note that the addresses listed in this appendix are for demonstration purposes only Do not use these addresses when configuring your local network Binary Conversion Table E 1 Appendix E Binary Conversion Table This table is provided to help you choose subnet numbers and host numbers for IP and MaclIP networks that use subnetting for IP addresses Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 0 0 32 100000 64 1000000 96 1100000 1 1 33 1000001 65 1000001 97 1100001 2 10 34 100010 66 1000010 98 1100010 3 11 35 100011 67 1000011 99 1100011 4 100 36 100100 68 1000100 100 1100100 5 101 37 100101 69 1000101 101 1100101 6 110 38 100110 70 1000110 102 1100110 7 111 39 100111 71 1000111 103 1100111 8 1000 40 101000 72 1001000 104 1101000 9 1001 41 101001 73 1001001 105 1101001 10 1010 42 101010 74 1001010 106 1101010 11 1011 43 101011 75 1001011 107 1101011 12 1100 44 101100 76 1001100 108 1101100 13 1101 45 101101 77 1001101 109 1101101
230. ol Unlike TCP UDP does not guarantee reliable sequenced packet delivery If data does not reach its destination UDP does not re transmit the data RFC 768 is the specification for UDP And there are many more ports defined in the Assigned Addresses RFC Security 14 31 Example TCP UDP Ports TCP Port Service UDP Port Service 20 21 FTP 161 SNMP 23 Telnet 69 TFTP Firewall design rules There are two basic rules to firewall design m What is not explicitly allowed is denied and m What is not explicitly denied is allowed The first rule is far more secure and is the best approach to firewall design It is far easier and more secure to allow in or out only certain services and deny anything else If the other rule is used you would have to figure out everything that you want to disallow now and future Firewall Logic Firewall design is a test of logic and filter rule ordering is critical If a packet is passed through a series of filter rules and then the packet matches a rule the appropriate action is taken The packet will not pass through the remainder of the filter rules For example if you had the following filter set Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Allow SMTP access Deny all other packets and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would pass through the first rule WWW go through the second rule FTP matches this rule and the packet is allowed throu
231. ollowing IPX features m IPXRIP and SAP NetBIOS broadcast packet forwarding IPX type 20 IPX packet filtering definable by source and destination IPX address and socket number for added security IPX SAP filtering to aid in optimizing WAN bandwidth Dial on demand features m Spoofing of IPX keep alive SPX and server serialization packets m Configurable RIP SAP timers on connection profiles IPX Definitions This section defines IPX related protocols such as RIP SAP and NetBIOS in addition to other related terms See the next section for setup instructions Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX IPX is a datagram connectionless protocol that Novell adapted from Xerox Network System s XNS Internet Datagram Protocol IDP IPX is dynamically routed and the routing architecture works by learning network addressing automatically 11 2 User s Reference Guide IPX address An IPX address consists of a network number a node number and a socket number An IPX network number is composed of eight hexadecimal digits The network number must be the same for all nodes on a particular physical network segment The node number is composed of twelve hexadecimal digits and is usually the hardware address of the interface card The node number must be unique inside the particular IPX network Socket numbers correspond to the particular service being accessed Socket A socket in IPX is the equivalent of a port in TCP IP Sockets route pac
232. only applies to Netopia R2121 models connecting over a dial up line using the PPP PAP TOKEN or PPP CACHE TOKEN authentication protocol Securing network environments Unauthorized tampering or theft of information on internal networks causes serious ramifications given the reliance on information systems Network abuse is a serious problem complicated by the difficulty in detecting the source of the abuses An unauthorized user can gain access to networks and copy information without leaving a trace Password protection is one solution but static passwords are often insecure They can be compromised allowing unauthorized users to disguise themselves as authorized users and enter supposedly secure systems However a company called Security Dynamics has patented a security authentication technology to increase network security SecurlD is a two factor authentication process to protect against unauthorized access This dynamic user authentication produces a randomly generated security code mechanism that changes every 60 seconds At login authorized users enter their password and the code displayed on their SecurlD token card While a password may be compromised the constantly changing access code which requires the token card during system use bars unauthorized users from entering the network Using the SecurlD token card Each SecurlD token card is programmed with an algorithm that ensures every code displayed is valid only for that user
233. onnection SDLC is a subset of the more generic HDLC High Level Data Link Control protocol developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO Glossary 7 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol An open network standard that defines how devices from different manufacturers communicate with each other over one or more interconnected networks TCP IP protocols are the foundation of the Internet a worldwide network of networks connecting businesses governments researchers and educators telephone wall cable 2 pair 4 pair or 8 pair 22 or 24 gauge solid copper wire cable Telephone wall cable is sometimes called telephone station cable or twisted pair cable TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol used to transfer files between IP nodes TFTP is often used to transfer firmware and configuration information from a UNIX computer acting as a TFTP server to an IP networking device such as the Netopia ISDN Router thicknet Industry jargon for 10Base 5 coaxial cable the original Ethernet cabling thinnet Industry jargon for 10Base 2 coaxial cable which is thinner smaller in diameter than the original Ethernet cabling UDP User Datagram Protocol A TCP IP protocol describing how packets reach applications in destination nodes V 90 A modem data transmission standard also known as V PCM which merges the K56flex standard with the competing x2 standard In September 19
234. or an authorized agent Under FCC rules no customer is authorized to repair this equipment This restriction applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or our of warranty It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to one of our authorized agents Service can be obtained at Netopia Inc 2470 Mariner Square Loop Alameda California 94501 Important This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of shielded cables and connectors between system components Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by the manufacturer could void your authority to operate the equipment Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emission from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Declaration for Canadian users The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operation and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user
235. or hosts and servers within your company m A Network Address Translation profile connects to the Internet via an ISP Even though the ISP assigns you a dynamic address each time you connect there will be no address space conflict since Network Address Translation hides the corporate address you use locally You enter the ISP s remote IP address as your default IP gateway so that any IP traffic not intended for your corporate intranet will be directed to the ISP Network Address Translation guidelines Observe the following guidelines when using Network Address Translation m The router can export just one local IP address per TCP port so you can have just one machine available for a given service such as one FTP server However some services such as Web servers www http servers allow you to change the TCP port on both the server and client With two different TCP ports 10 6 User s Reference Guide exported you can have Web servers on two different IP hosts m If you will be using multiple Connection Profiles define the remote IP address of the most accessible profile such as that for your ISP to the default IP gateway in the TCP IP settings on users workstations That way IP traffic not intended specifically for any of the remote networks will be routed through this preferred profile m Associate your primary Domain Name Server DNS with whichever profile is more accessible If you choose for neither profile to be
236. ord and enter your password If you selected PAP TOKEN you don t enter the password now m If your ISP uses CHAP select Send Host Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect Then select Send Secret and enter the secret CHAP term for password your ISP gave you m If your ISP uses CACHE TOKEN select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect Select Send Password and enter your password You can specify user name and password for both outgoing and incoming calls Your name and password can be up to 32 characters each 8 WAN and System Configuration 8 5 The Channel Usage pop up menu allows you to choose how many lines your connections may use and whether or not they are preemptable Supported options are Option Behavior Dynamic 1 to 3 channels if available will be used depending on traffic volume 1 Channel Only 1 channel will be used 2 Channels 2 channels will be preferred 2 Channel Preemptable 2 channels will be used but 1 may be reallocated 3 Channels 3 channels will be preferred 3 Channel Preemptable 3 channels will be used but 1 or more may be reallocated Note The Bandwidth Allocation pop up options are Off Auto BAP or MP BAP is the default You should only choose one of the other options if you are specifically advised to do so by your ISP or administrator Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select Telco Op
237. ormation G 1 Appendix G Technical Specifications and Safety Information Pinouts for Auxiliary Port Modem Cable 1300 ohms CANON AWNH i a ry OCMANDOAWNH ye fo BRAID Shield HD 15 DB 25 Pin 1 Ground Pin 1 not used Pin 2 TDA Pin 2 TD Pin 3 TDB Pin 3 RD Pin 4 RDA Pin 4 RTS Pin 5 RDB Pin 5 CTS Pin 6 not used Pin 6 DCE Ready Pin 7 DTR Pin 7 Ground Pin 8 CTS Pin 8 RLSD G 2 User s Reference Guide HD 15 DB 25 Pin 9 DSR Pin 9 RSET EIA 530 Pin 10 DCD Pin 10 not used Pin 11 not used Pin 11 TSET EIA 530 Pin 12 TCA Pin 12 not used Pin 13 TCB Pin 13 not used Pin 14 RCA Pin 14 TD EIA 530 STD EIA 232 Pin 15 RCB Pin 15 not used Pin 16 RD EIA 530 SRD EIA 232 Pin 17 RSET Pin 18 not used Pin 19 RTS EIA 530 SRTS EIA 232 Pin 20 DTE Ready Pin 21 not used Pin 22 not used Pin 23 Ground Pin 24 TSET Pin 25 not used Note Certain RS 232 modems do not properly accept signals on pins 12 24 13 11 14 17 and 15 9 For these applications these pins may need to be cut Description Dimensions 124 0 cm w x 20 0 cm d x 5 3 cm h 9 4 w x 7 9 d x 2 1 h Communications interfaces The Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router has two RJ 45 jacks for modem con
238. ows to and from a serial device server A device or system that has been specifically configured to provide a service usually to a group of clients SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol used for communication between management consoles and network devices The Netopia ISDN Router can be managed through SNMP soft seeding A router setting In soft seeding if a router that has just been reset detects a network number or zone name conflict between its configured information for a particular port and the information provided by another router connected to that port it updates its configuration using the information provided by the other router See also hard seeding non seeding seeding and seed router subnet A network address created by using a subnet mask to specify that a number of bits in an internet address will be used as a subnet number rather than a host address subnet mask A 32 bit number to specify which part of an internet address is the network number and which part is the host address When written in binary notation each bit written as 1 corresponds to 1 bit of network address information One subnet mask applies to all IP devices on an individual IP network SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control A link4evel communications protocol used in an International Business Machines IBM Systems Network Architecture SNA network that manages synchronous code trans parent serial information transfer over a link c
239. pleTalk packets on Ethernet using EtherTalk Phase Il if the optional AppleTalk feature set is Monitoring Tools 13 5 installed m LT LocalTalk on the PhoneNET if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed The right side of the table lists the total number of occurrences of each of five types of communication statistics EN Rx Packets The number of Ethernet packets received EN Rx Errors The number of bad Ethernet packets received EN Collisions An error occurring when Ethernet packets are transmitted simultaneously by nodes on the LAN WAN Connection Statistics The WAN Connection Statistics give the following information about each channel of the point to point interface m The number of bytes and packets received through the channel m The number of bytes and packets transmitted through the channel Event Histories The Netopia R2121 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories Event histories are useful for diagnosing problems because they list what happened before during and after a problem occurs You can view two different event histories one for the router s system and one for the WAN The Netopia R2121 s built in battery backup prevents loss of event history from a shut down or reset The Router s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first and to make it easy to distinguish error messages from informational messages Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk Both the WAN Ev
240. pplies certain rules before installing enabled static routes in the IP routing table An enabled static route will not be installed in the IP routing table if any of the following conditions are true m The static route s Next Gateway IP Address matches the IP address used by a connection profile or the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port m The static route s Next Gateway IP Address matches an IP address in the range of IP addresses being distributed by MacIP or DHCP m The static route s Next Gateway IP Address is determined to be unreachable by the Netopia R2121 m The static route s route information conflicts with a connection profile s route information m The connection profile associated with the static route is set for dialin connections only and there is no incoming call connected to that connection profile m The connection profile associated with the static route has a disabled dial on demand setting and there is no current connection using that connection profile A static route is already installed in the IP routing table will be removed if any of the conditions listed above become true for that static route However an enabled static route is automatically reinstalled once the conditions listed above are no longer true for that static route 10 16 User s Reference Guide IP address serving Serve DHCP Clients Serve BootP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Serve Mac IP KIP Clients Main System IP Address
241. r network with manual or static IP addresses Be sure each computer on your network has its own IP address Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 15 Dynamic configuration using MaclIP optional If you want to use MaclIP to dynamically assign IP addresses to the Macintosh computers on your network you must install the optional AppleTalk feature set kit Note You cannot use MacIP dynamic configuration to configure your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router because you must first configure the router in order to enable AppleTalk Once the AppleTalk kit is installed you can configure your Macintoshes for MaclP To configure dynamically using MacIP perform the following Using Open Transport TCP IP 1 Go to the Apple menu Select Control Panels and then TCP IP 2 With the TCP IP window open go to the Edit menu and select User Mode Choose Advanced and click OK m TRAP MaciP mi hai Cee O F cine Line Daig is Bi Server nal ECI l a t Ea impish bia id Fat wikit w Star ag dorain raris Fadren EBITESENR Erdira irnir nyre AT aial Gears eed Rear reer miir nal ni 20 ap 3 Inthe TCP IP window select or type information into the fields as shown in the following table TCP IP Option Select Type Connect via AppleTalk MacIP Configure Using MacIP server MaclP Server zone select available zone Name server address Enter the primary and secondary name server addresses given to you by your
242. race a route follow these steps 1 Select Host Name or IP Address and enter the name or address of the destination you want to trace 2 Select Maximum hops 1 64 to set the maximum number of routers to count between the Netopia Router and the destination router up to the maximum of 64 The default is 30 hops 3 Select Timeout per probe 1 10 sec to set when the trace will timeout for each hop up to 10 seconds The default is 3 seconds 4 Select Use Reverse DNS to learn the names of the routers between the Netopia Router and the destination router The default is Yes 5 Select START TRACE ROUTE and press Return The screen will be replaced by a scrolling screen listing the destination the number of hops the IP addresses of each hop and the DNS names if selected 6 Cancel the trace by pressing Escape Return to the Trace Route screen by pressing Escape twice Telnet client The Telnet client mode replaces the normal menu mode Telnet sessions can be cascaded that is you can initiate a Telnet client session when using a Telnet console session To activate the Telnet client select Telnet from the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu 15 6 User s Reference Guide The Telnet client screen appears Telnet Host Name or IP Address Control Character to Suspend Q START A TELNET SESSION Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host m Enter the host name or the IP address in dotted decimal format of the machine you wa
243. ral networks of any AppleTalk type may share a zone name 8 User s Reference Guide Index Numerics 10Base T 5 4 10Base T connecting 54 A Add Static Route 10 14 Adding a filter set 14 13 advanced configuration features 8 9 answer profile call acceptance scenarios 9 7 defined 9 4 answering calls 9 4 AppleTalk 1 2 configuring LocalTalk 12 7 routing table 13 9 tunneling AURP 12 3 12 8 zones 12 6 12 7 AppleTalk routing table 13 9 AppleTalk setup 12 1 AppleTalk Update Based Routing Protocol see AURP Application software 5 2 AURP adding a partner 12 9 configuration 12 10 connecting to a partner 12 9 hop count reduction 12 11 network number remapping 12 11 receiving connections 12 10 setup 12 3 128 AURP setup 12 8 AURP tunnel 14 21 Index 1 authentication and answer profile 9 6 Basic Firewall 14 19 BOOTP 10 16 BOOTP Clients 10 19 broadcast C 13 broadcasts C 13 c Call acceptance scenarios 9 7 capabilities 1 1 Change Static Route 10 15 CHAP and answer profile 9 6 Community strings 13 14 configuration files downloading with TFTP 15 9 downloading with XMODEM 15 12 uploading with TFTP 15 10 uploading with XMODEM 15 12 configuring SmartPhone 9 2 telephone connections 9 2 with console based management 6 1 7 1 8 1 Configuring profiles for incoming calls 9 6 configuring terminal emulation software 6 3 configuring the console 8 12 Connecting to an Ethernet network 5 3 Connecting to the
244. re performing This Table of Contents page you are viewing consists of hypertext links to the chapters and headings listed If you are viewing this on line just click any link below to go to that heading Configuration options for your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router 1 1 Small Office connection to the Internet 2 2 Small Office connection to the Internet 3 3 Direct Connection to a Corporate Office Telecommuter 4 4 Configured to accept incoming dial up connections 5 5 Configured for two onboard and one external modem on the PUA DO iiiciiien ita eee nian 6 Part Getting Started Chapter d Introduce tlonaceissisiesskesinestaxtiowe es wlecdastaatabeianaants 1 1 Te PAIS E E AEE EE AE ETT 1 1 Features and capabilities cecciceceersicecessireeenessicevessinewenersice 1 1 HOW to SE is GUIE siunaan 1 2 Chapter 2 Making the Physical Connections 2 1 Find a OC iOi anaana a 2 1 What YOR PECA irran a 2 1 Identify the connectors and attach the cables n a 2 2 Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Back Panel Ports 24 Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Status Lights 2 6 Chapter 3 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 1 Before running Smart Stari acs cnconitenccnassanednaxenderadeareonnns 3 1 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 3 SmartStart Wizard configuration screens 3 3 Easy OPen 34 Advanced Opi Jiena 3 8 Sharing ENC UME CGI sats cpSi
245. reen If the test fails check the following Check your cable connections Be sure you have connected the router and the computer properly using the correct cables Refer to the Step 1 Connect the Router sheet in your Netopia R2121 documentation folio Make sure the router is turned on and that there is an Ethernet connection between your computer and the router Check the TCP IP control panel settings to be sure that automatic IP Addressing Windows or DHCP Macintosh is selected If you are using a Windows PC SmartStart will automatically detect a static IP address and offer to configure the computer for automatic addressing On a Macintosh computer you must manually set the TCP IP Control Panel to DHCP See Configuring TCP IP on Macintosh computers on page 3 13 If you currently use a static IP address outside the 192 168 1 x network and want to continue using it use the Advanced option to assign the router an IP address in your target IP range See Advanced option on page 3 8 If all of the above steps fail to resolve the problem reset the router to its factory default settings and rerun SmartStart Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 5 When the test is successful you will see the Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen shown below Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen The miras wma Cares ian Pais SmartStart Wizard asks you to select a method of Pe Yoon coregcts probin
246. rmware also known as V PCM which merges the K56flex standard with the competing x2 standard K56flex firmware can be found on the Netopia CD for XMODEM transfer to the onboard modems if your ISP supports that technology Subsequent modem firmware updates will be made available on the Netopia website See Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP and Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM in Chapter 15 Utilities and Diagnostics Glossary 1 Glossary Access Line A telephone line reaching from the telephone company central office to a point usually on your premises Beyond this point the wire is considered inside wiring See also Trunk Line analog In telecommunications telephone transmission and or switching that is not digital An analog phone transmission is one that was originally intended to carry speech or voice but may with appropriate modifications be used to carry data of other types ANSI American National Standards Institute Devises and proposes recommendations for international communications standards See also Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique CCITT AppleTalk A comprehensive network system designed and developed by Apple Computer Inc AppleTalk allows many different types of computer systems printers and servers to communicate on a variety of cabling schemes including LocalTalk and Ethernet cabling In this manual AppleTalk refers especia
247. rovider to find out if your line is provisioned for CallerlD Also note that if the calling side has instructed the phone company to block delivery of its caller ID the answering side will not be able to authenticate If your line does not support the appropriate service CNA may not work properly 3 To force incoming calls to match connection profiles select Must Match a Defined Profile and toggle it to Yes Incoming calls that cannot be matched to a connection profile are dropped To allow unmatched calls to be accepted as standard IP or IPX connections toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes the answer profile only accepts calls that use the same authentication method defined in the Authentication item If PAP or CHAP are involved the caller must have a name and password or secret that match one of the connection profiles The caller must obtain these from you or your network administrator before initiating the call For example if Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes and Authentication is set to PAP then only incoming calls that use PAP and match a connection profile will be accepted by the answer profile If authentication in the Default Answer Profile is set to CHAP the value of the CHAP Challenge Name item must be identical to the value of the Send Host Name item of the Connection Profile to be matched by the caller If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No Authenticatio
248. rrent Transfer Bytes 0 The sections below describe how to update the Router s firmware and how to download and upload configuration files Updating firmware Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization s network administrator There are two types of firmware in the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router router firmware and modem firmware The router firmware governs how the router communicates with your network and the modems the modem firmware governs how the modems communicate with the remote site Modem firmware for example to support the ITU V 90 standard is included on your Netopia CD for XMODEM transfer and later updates will be available on the Netopia website Router firmware updates are also periodically posted on the Netopia website To update either the Router s or the internal modems firmware follow these steps m Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located m Select Firmware File Name and enter the name of the file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need to enter a file path along with the file Utilities and Diagnostics 15 9 name for example bigroot config myfile m Select Send Firmware to Netopia from TFTP Server and press Return You wi
249. rrow keys to select a partner then press Return to go to the Change AURP Partner screen 12 10 User s Reference Guide Deleting an AURP partner To delete an AURP partner select Delete Partner in the AURP Setup screen and press Return to display a table of existing partners Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select an AURP partner then press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit without deleting a partner Receiving AURP connections To control the acceptance of incoming AURP tunnels select Accept Connections From and choose Anyone or Configured Partners Only from the pop up menu If you choose Anyone all incoming AURP connections will be accepted The more secure option is Configured Partners Only which only accepts connections from recognized AURP partners the ones you have set up Configuring AURP Options In the AURP Setup screen Select AURP Options and go to the AURP Options screen Using AURP can cause a problem when two networks one local and one remote have the same network number This may cause network routing ambiguities than can result in routing errors AURP Options Tickle Interval HH MM SS 00 00 00 Update Interval HH MM SS 00 00 30 Enable Network Number Remapping Yes Remap into Range From 4096 To Cluster Remote Networks No Enable Hop Count Reduction No Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Select Tickle Pkt Rqst Interval HH MM SS
250. rs and filter sets beginning on page 144 Security 14 13 IP Filter Sets Display Change IP Filter Set Add IP Filter Set Delete IP Filter Set Return Enter to configure and add a new Filter Set Set Up IP Filter Sets Firewalls from this and the following Menus The procedure for creating and maintaining filter sets is as follows 1 Add a new filter set 2 Create the filters for the new filter set 3 View change or delete individual filters and filter sets The sections below explain how to execute these steps Adding a filter set You can create up to eight different custom filter sets Each filter set can contain up to 16 output filters and up to 16 input filters To add a new filter set select Add IP Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add Filter Set screen Note There are two groups of items in the Add Filter Set screen one for input filters and one for output filters The two groups work in essentially the same way as you ll see below 14 14 User s Reference Guide Add IP Filter Set Filter Set Name Filter Set 2 Display Change Input Filter Add Input Filter Delete Input Filter Display Change Output Filter Add Output Filter Delete Output Filter ADD FILTER SET CANCEL Configure the Filter Set name and its associated Filters Naming a new filter set All new filter sets have a default name The first filter set you add will be cal
251. rt TCP IP must be software configured See Configuring TCP IP on installed and properly configured See Windows 95 98 or NT computers on Configuring TCP IP on Macintosh page 3 9 computers on page 3 13 Connectivity Ethernet card 10Base T Either a builtin or third party Ethernet card hardware 10Base T Browser Netscape Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer included on the Netopia CD software Required for web based registration and web based monitoring 3 2 User s Reference Guide PC Macintosh otes e The computer running SmartStart must be on the same Ethernet cable segment as the Netopia R2121 Repeaters such as 10Base T hubs between your computer and the Netopia R2121 are acceptable but devices such as switches or other routers are not e SmartStart for the PC will set your TCP IP control panel to Obtain an IP address automatically if it is not already set this way This will cause your computer to reboot If you have a specified IP address configured in the computer you should make a note of it before running SmartStart in case you do not want to use the dynamic addressing features built in to the Netopia Router and need to restore the fixed IP address Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3 3 Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard The SmartStart Wizard is tailored for your platform but it works the same way on either a PC or a Macintosh Insert the Netopia
252. ructions G 6 User s Reference Guide About 56K Line Access H 1 Appendix H About 56K Line Access The Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog is capable of 56Kbps per line connections This means that if you use both onboard modems you can achieve inbound data transfer rates of up to 112Kbps Using a third modem bumps the theoretical speed limit to 168Kbps This section describes some practical limitations on the previous statements A current FCC limitation will only permit a maximum speed of 52Kbps over analog phone lines using combined analog digital technology Also the data transfer rates are for inbound data only Outbound data is limited to the current transfer rates for analog phone lines alone which is 33 6Kbps So using both onboard modems under optimal conditions will yield an inbound data transfer rate of 104Kbps and an outbound rate of 67 2Kbps This means that your incoming email file transfers and downloads web browsing and so on occur at 104Kbps while your outgoing information such as outbound email travels at 67 2Kbps With a third modem the rates become 156Kbps inbound and 100 8Kbps outbound Also to achieve the maximum inbound rates the ISP side data must be digitally sourced Outbound data Inbound data Above a certain threshold called Shannon s Limit the signal to noise ratio of any medium becomes too low to reliably transfer data The analog phone line is the limiting factor in the speed of data transmissio
253. s such as Ethernet as well as the dial up telephone networks and packet switching systems LocalTalk was originally known as the AppleTalk Personal Network system Each computer or peripheral device printer client file server connected to a network is called a node and has a unique node address which can be any number from 1 to 254 Whenever you open the Chooser or any application that communicates with other computers on your network your application compiles a list of all node names and addresses All you see are the names for example Paul sMac TechSports Writer or 2nd Floor AppleShare but your application also knows the node addresses of all these devices When you send information commands or requests to a printer server or another workstation your application formats the information into units known as packets It then attaches the correct address to the packets and sends them to the AppleTalk software on your computer which forwards the packets across the network Packets also include a return address so the receiver will know where to reply 12 2 User s Reference Guide If the cabling of your network were a street system then a node address would correspond to a building s street address Node addresses are not permanent Each AppleTalk device determines its node address at startup Although a Macintosh that is starting up will try to use its previous address the address will often be different upo
254. s have been allocated Select 1st Client Address and enter the first client IP address that you will allocate to your first client machine For instance on your local area network you may first want to figure out what machines are going to be allocated specific static IP addresses so that you can determine the pool of IP addresses that you will be serving addresses from via DHCP BOOTP Dynamic WAN and or MacIP Example Your ISP has given your Netopia R2121 the IP address 192 168 6 137 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 248 The subnet mask allocated will give you six IP addresses to use when connecting to the ISP over the Internet for more information on understanding IP addressing refer to Appendix C Understanding IP Addressing Your address range will be from 137 143 In this example you would enter 192 168 6 138 as the 1st client address as the router itself must have an IP address To enable DHCP select Serve DHCP Clients and toggle it to Yes DHCP serving is automatic when IP Address Serving is enabled 10 18 User s Reference Guide DHCP NetBIOS Options If your network uses NetBIOS you can enable the Netopia R2121 to use DHCP to distribute NetBIOS information NetBIOS stands for Network Basic Input Output System It is a layer of software originally developed by IBM and Sytek to link a network operating system with specific hardware NetBIOS has been adopted as an industry standard It offers LAN applications a variet
255. s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection Insome cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to the certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Technical Specifications and Safety Information G 5 Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telep
256. s tiveera enna an aed ead te GL 1 Contents ix INGO XS ocigs Deangtideacelagst gecehadencatite fe agendencniedat ate lactncenada feaeeadtee Index 1 Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies s an 1 User s Reference Guide Configuration options for your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router The Netopia R2121 can be used in different ways depending on your needs In general you will probably want to use it in one or more of the following ways Click on one of these links m 1 Small Office connection to the Internet with several computers in your office sharing a Single IP address Network Address Translation enabled mw 2 Small Office connection to the Internet with a block of IP addresses Network Address Translation disabled m 3 Direct Connection to a Corporate Office Telecommuter m 4 Configured to accept incoming dial up connections m 5 Configured for two onboard and one external modem on the Auxiliary port This section is intended to give you a path to the appropriate installation and configuration instructions based on your intended use for the Netopia R2121 netopia 1 Small Office connection to the Internet For Small Office connections to the Internet using a single dynamic IP address with Network Address Translation NAT enabled you should use the following configuration option m the SmartStart Wizard included on your Netopia R2121 CD This is the fastest and simplest wa
257. s to increase 14 1 telnet 144 user accounts passwords 14 2 Security Options screen 14 2 seeding 12 3 Service Advertising Protocol SAP 11 2 Setting the IP trap receivers 13 16 Show Static Routes 10 13 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SmartIP 10 1 SmartPhone 9 1 configuring 9 2 SmartStart before launching 3 1 requirements Macintosh 3 1 PC 3 1 troubleshooting Macintosh A 2 PC A 1 Windows 95 3 3 SmartView 4 1 launching SmartView 4 1 SNMP community strings 13 14 MIBs supported 13 13 traps 13 15 SNMP Setup screen 13 14 SNMP traps 13 15 Socket 11 2 soft seeding 12 3 Src Port 14 10 State 13 10 static IP addresses C 8 static routes 10 12 Statistics WAN 134 subnet masks C 3 subnets C 2 C 5 multiple 10 10 nested C 11 subnets and subnet masks C 2 T TCP IP stack 5 2 Technical support A 3 telnet 6 2 access 8 8 14 4 terminal emulation software configuring 6 3 default settings 64 TFTP defined 15 7 downloading configuration files 15 9 updating firmware 15 8 uploading configuration files 15 10 Index 5 TFTP transferring files 15 7 Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP 15 7 Trivial File Transfer Protocol see TFTP Troubleshooting A 1 troubles hooting console based management 7 2 event histories 4 3 13 5 SmartStart Macintosh A 2 PC A 1 WAN statistics 13 4 Trusted host 14 20 Trusted subnet 14 20 tunneling 12 3 U unproxied addresses 10 1 updating firmware with TFTP 15 8 with XMODEM 15 1
258. s within a range reserved by the Internet address administration authority for use within private networks 192 168 1 1 Because this is a private network address it should never be directly connected to the Internet Using NAT for all your connection profiles will ensure this restriction See IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 of this guide for more information Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask your ISP has given you The Ethernet Subnet Mask defaults to a standard class C mask for unlimited user models smaller for restricted user models Select Domain Name and enter the domain name your ISP has given you Select Primary Domain Name Server and enter the IP address your ISP has given you The Default IP Gateway defaults to the remote IP address you entered in the Easy Setup connection profile If the Netopia Router does not recognize the destination of any IP traffic it forwards that traffic to this gateway Do not confuse the remote IP address and the default gateway s IP address with the block of local IP addresses you receive from your ISP You use the local IP addresses for the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port and for IP clients on your local network The remote IP address and the default gateway s IP address should point to your ISP s router To use DHCP and if installed MacIP address serving toggle IP Address Serving to On Note For information about dynamic IP address ser
259. se the guide s table of contents and index to locate informational topics Making the Physical Connections 2 1 Chapter 2 Making the Physical Connections This section tells you how to make the physical connections to your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router This section covers the following topics m Find a location on page 2 1 m What you need on page 2 1 m Identify the connectors and attach the cables on page 2 2 m Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router Status Lights on page 24 Find a location When choosing a location for the Netopia Router consider m Available space and ease of installation m Physical layout of the building and how to best use the physical space available in relation to connecting your Netopia Router to the LAN m Available wiring and jacks m Distance from the point of installation to the next device length of cable or wall wiring m Ease of access to the front of the unit for configuration and monitoring m Ease of access to the back of the unit for checking and changing cables m Cable length and network size limitations when expanding networks For small networks install the Netopia R2121 near one of the LANs For large networks you can install the Netopia R2121 in a wiring closet or a central network administration site What you need Locate all items that you need for the installation Included in your router package are m The Netopia R2121 with Dual Analog A power adapter an
260. see Suggested security measures on page 14 1 SNMP traps An SNMP trap is an informational message sent from an SNMP agent in this case the Netopia R2121 to a manager When a manager receives a trap it may log the trap as well as generate an alert message of its own Standard traps generated by the Netopia R2121 include the following m An authentication failure trap is generated when the router detects an incorrect community string in a received SNMP packet Authentication Traps Enable must be On for this trap to be generated m Acold start trap is generated after the router is reset m An interface down trap ifDown is generated when one of the router s interfaces such as a port stops functioning or is disabled m An interface up trap ifUp is generated when one of the router s interfaces such as a port begins functioning The Netopia R2121 sends traps using UDP for IP networks You can specify which SNMP managers are sent the IP traps generated by the Netopia R2121 Up to eight receivers can be set You can also review and remove IP traps Go to the IP Trap Receivers screen by selecting IP Trap Receivers in the SNMP Setup screen 13 16 User s Reference Guide IP Trap Receivers Display Change IP Trap Receiver Add IP Trap Receiver Delete IP Trap Receiver Return Enter to modify an existing Trap Receiver Navigate from here to view add modify and delete IP Trap Receivers Setting the IP
261. set up MaclP and other IP addressing schemes AURP AppleTalk Update Based Routing Protocol AURP allows AppleTalk networks to communicate across an IP network Your local AppleTalk networks connected to the Netopia R2121 can exchange data with remote AppleTalk networks that are also connected to an AURP capable router When two networks using AppleTalk communicate with each other through a network based on the Internet Protocol they are said to be tunneling through the IP network The Netopia R2121 uses AURP to allow your AppleTalk network to tunnel to designated AppleTalk partner networks as well as to accept connections from remote AppleTalk networks tunneling to your AppleTalk LAN Routers and seeding To configure AppleTalk networks you must understand the concept of seeding Seeding is the process by which routers or more specifically router ports agree on what routing information is valid AppleTalk routers that have been reset for example must decide what zones and network numbers are valid before they begin routing In this case a router may use the information it has stored or use information it receives from another router depending on how it has been configured To help ensure agreement between routers on a network a seed router is configured with the correct information and other routers obtain their information from that router when they are turned on or reset Routers commonly use one of three types of seeding proce
262. sions You can have your Netopia R2121 dynamically assign IP addresses using MacTCP however to do so requires that the optional AppleTalk kit be installed which can only be done after the router is configured m You must have built in Ethernet or a third party Ethernet card and its associated drivers installed in your Macintosh Dynamic configuration recommended If you configure your Netopia R2121 using SmartStart you can accept the dynamic IP address assigned by your router The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP which enables dynamic addressing is enabled by default in the router To configure your Macintosh computer for dynamic addressing do the following TORT P Bavier Pare 1 Go to the Apple menu Select Control Panels and then TCP IP 2 With the TCP IP window open go to the Edit menu and select User Mode Choose Basic and click OK 3 Inthe TCP IP window select Connect via Ethernet and Configure Using DHCP Server Note You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network to accept IP addresses served by the Netopia R2121 3 14 User s Reference Guide Static configuration optional If you are manually configuring for a fixed or static IP address E TRAP Ioana IF E perform the following Be Dem 1 Go to the Apple menu Select Control Panels and then ing Coan carta TORR TCP IP or MacTCP nell eee 2 With the TCP IP window open go to the Edit menu and ma
263. ski ir ue Rowe aap ed creating a connection profile The connection profile tells 2 Seer eres oe your router how to communicate with your ISP or other ET pakar RA remote site such as your corporate office You can select iy eun Ee Aa either ISP Automation or Manual Entry pi avecin uate b caga ta iy Li Options are explained below FL a rot a Make your selection and click Next If you select ISP Automation SmartStart offers you the option of choosing one of several Netopia ISP partners that support the Netopia R2121 You then see the Internet Service Provider Selection screen on page 3 5 If you select Manual Entry you must be prepared with the following information You must enter m Your dial up number sometimes referred to as an ISP POP number m Your Login name and Password These are case sensitive m Any PBX or Centrex phone system dialing prefix such as 9 for an outside line m Your PPP authentication method Options are PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol or None Most ISPs use PAP this is the default m Your Domain Name Server DNS this entry must be an IP address in dotted decimal format for example 192 168 4 10 not joe isp com m Optionally an alternate DNS if your ISP provided one If you select Manual Entry the Connection Profile screen shown Connection Profile screen on page 3 6 appears Internet Service Provi
264. ss Translation Enabled to Yes or No Yes to enable NAT and press Return The Easy Setup Connection Profile is accessible either from the Easy Setup menu in the Main Menu screen go to the Next Screen Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Number to Dial 12345678901234567890 Address Translation Enabled Yes Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 0 0 0 PPP Authentication PAP Send User Name Send Password PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Enter the directory number for the remote network connection Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen or from the WAN Configuration menu in the Main Menu screen Go to the Display Change Connection 10 4 User s Reference Guide Profile screen You access the Address Translation option from the IP Profile Parameters menu IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Local WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set Receive RIP Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Select the Local WAN IP Address field The default address is 0 0 0 0 which allows for dynamic addressing meaning that your ISP assigns an address each time you connect However if you want to use static addressing you may enter a specific address 4 When your Netopia R2121 connects to the ISP the remote router assig
265. stall Introduction to the Simple Gateway Monitoring Protocol IEEE Network March 1988 Chapman D Brent and Elizabeth D Zwicky Building Internet Firewalls Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1995 Dense and technical but Chapter 6 provides a basic introduction to packet filtering Chapman D Brent Network In Security Through IP Packet Filtering paper available from Great Circle Associates 1057 West Dana Street Mountain View CA 94041 Chappell L Novell s Guide to NetWare LAN Analysis San Jose California Novell Press 1993 Clark W SNA Internetworking ConneXions The Interoperability Report Vol 6 No 3 March 1992 Coltun R OSPF An Internet Routing Protocol Connexions The Interoperability Report Vol 3 No 8 August 1989 Comer D E Internetworking with TCP IP Principles Protocols and Architecture Vol 2nd ed Englewood Cliffs New J ersey Prentice Hall 1991 Davidson J An Introduction to TCP IP New York New York Springer Verlag 1992 Ferrari D Computer Systems Performance Evaluation Englewood Cliffs New J ersey Prentice Hall 1978 Garcia Luna Aceves J J Loop Free Routing Using Diffusing Computations Publication pending in IEEE ACM Transactions on Networking Vol 1 No 1 1993 Garfinkel Simson PGP Pretty Good Privacy Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1991 A guide to the free data encryption program PGP and the issues surrounding encryption Green
266. stics from the Main Menu and press Return Note The Secure Authentication Monitor field will remain hidden if PAP TOKEN or CACHE TOKEN is not the selected authentication method in the connection profile 14 40 User s Reference Guide Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Secure Authentication Monitor Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP X Modem File Transfer Revert to Factory Defaults Restart System 1 Select Secure Authentication Monitor and press Return The Secure Authentication Monitor screen appears 2 Wait for the call to initiate Secure Authentication Monitor Current Connection Status Profile Name State Use Remote Address Est More Info Status Passcode Required For Connection Profile Easy Setup Profile 0 Challenge Enter PASSCODE Passcode 123412345678 3 From the fields that appear select Enter PASSCODE and press Return Enter your PIN and the code displayed on your security authentication token card LED 4 Once the call is established and you enter your passcode as prompted PPP negotiation will continue If the call is specified for PAP TOKEN and the session involves more than one connection you will be prompted for each connection being brought up Security 14 41 Note When using CACHE TOKEN your passcode is valid for a time interval determined by the network administrator When this time interval expires you must provid
267. stination IP address to match Proto The protocol to match This can be entered as a number See the table below or as TCP or UDP if using those protocols Protocol Number to use Full name N A 0 Ignores protocol type ICMP 1 Internet Control Message Protocol TCP 6 Transmission Control Protocol 14 10 User s Reference Guide Protocol Number to use Full name UDP 17 User Datagram Protocol Src Port The source port to match This is the port on the sending host that originated the packet D Port The destination port to match This is the port on the receiving host for which the packet is intended On Displays Yes when the filter is in effect or No when it is not Fwd Shows whether the filter forwards Yes a packet or discards No it when there s a match Filtering example 1 Returning to our filtering rule example from above see page 14 7 look at how a rule is translated into a filter Start with the rule then fill in the filter s attributes 1 The rule you want to implement as a filter is Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 The host 199 211 211 17 is the source of the Telnet packets you want to block while the destination address is any IP address How these IP addresses are masked determines what the final match will be although the mask is not displayed in the table that displays the filter sets you set it when yo
268. t s why manually distributed addresses are sometimes called static addresses Static addresses are useful in cases when you want to make sure that a host on your network cannot have its address taken away by the address server A network administrator s computer a computer dedicated to communicating with the Internet and routers are appropriate candidates for a static address Using address serving The Netopia R2121 provides three ways to serve IP addresses to computers on a network The first Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is supported by PCs with Microsoft Windows and a TCP IP stack Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system may also be able to use DHCP The second way MacIP is for Macintosh computers The third way called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients IPCP is used to fulfill WAN client requirements The Netopia R2121 can use both DHCP and MaclP Whether you use one or both will depend on your particular networking environment If that environment includes both PCs and Macintosh computers that do not use Open Transport you will need to use both DHCP and MaclP to distribute IP addresses to all of your computers Serve dynamic WAN clients The third method used to fulfill WAN client requirements is called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients This is a subset of PPP Originally this would apply only to switched WAN interface routers and not to leased line routers However a new feature can g
269. t History See WAN Event History on page 13 6 The Syslog client for the PC only is supplied as a ZIP file on the Netopia CD Select Logging from the System Configuration menu The Logging Configuration screen appears Logging Configuration WAN Event Log Options Log Boot and Errors Log Line Specific Log Connections Log PPP DHCP CNA Log IP and IPX Syslog Parameters Syslog Enabled No Hostname or IP Address Facility Local 0 Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels 8 14 User s Reference Guide By default all events are logged in the event history m By toggling each event descriptor either Yes or No you can determine which ones are logged and which are ignored m You can enable or disable the syslog client dynamically When enabled it will report any appropriate and previously unreported events m You can Specify the syslog server s address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up to 63 characters m You can specify the UNIX syslog Facility to use by selecting the Facility pop up Installing the Syslog client The Goodies folder on the Netopia CD contains a Syslog client daemon program that can be configured to report the WAN events you specified in the Logging Configuration screen To install the Syslog client daemon exit from the graphical Netopia CD program and locate the CD directory structure through your Windows desktop or through Windows Explorer Go to the Goodies d
270. t Leer h Dhi inl aed Oot SE Ted Whap Mikha wog DHS EET D43 Aaa Lo Core Prete Miser Trace Um poe dices ES mi Tats m To hang up the current connection and establish the one you select click the Disconnect button for the currently active Connection Profile m Click the tab for the Connection Profile you want to activate m Click the Connect Button for this Connection Profile Event History pages The Netopia R2121 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories Event histories are useful for diagnosing problems because they list what happened before during and after a problem occurs You can view two different event histories one for the router s system and one for the WAN The Netopia R2121 s built in battery backup prevents loss of event history from a shut down or reset The Router s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first and to make it easy to distinguish error messages from informational messages Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk Both the WAN Event History and the Device Event History retain records of up to 128 of the most recent events You can refresh the Event history logs by clicking the Update button 4 4 User s Reference Guide Device Event History page iachina ints CuenncenPreies Devo Beet Hoy uty fam hie eu rT WAN Event History page IET R MaE einemi Syreeta bore cam OPE aid AY r a ee ppn ape E da F denion FLT COCA eds Link i
271. t Seeding From the pop up menu choose the type of seeding for the Netopia R2121 s LocalTalk port to use See Routers and seeding on page 12 3 You have finished configuring LocalTalk AURP setup To set up AURP select AppleTalk Setup from the Network Protocols screen Select AURP Setup and press Return AURP Setup AURP Enable Display Change Partner Add Partner Delete Partner Enter Free Trade Zone Name Accept Connections From Configured Partners Only Advanced Options AURP Allows you to connect remote AppleTalk Networks across IP m To activate AURP and enable connections to and from AURP partners select AURP Enable and toggle it to On Viewing AURP partners m To see a table of existing AURP partners select Display Show Partners and press Return Note The Netopia R2121 can define a total of 32 AURP partners AURP Free Trade Zone The Free Trade Zone is an AURP security feature It allows the Netopia administrator to specify a single AppleTalk zone that will be the only one visible to the remote side for partners that have this option enabled Example AppleTalk Setup 12 9 Site A has an AURP tunnel to site B Both sides have multiple zones defined on the EtherTalk port and a unique zone on their LocalTalk ports If side A has indicated one of its EtherTalk zones is the Free Trade Zone and has opted to use the Free Trade Zone option for its tunnel to B then only this Free Trade Zone wi
272. t may be unnecessary calls by changing the Update Interval value to some larger value At the end of this time window if there has been a local AppleTalk network change the Netopia R2121 will call any remote AURP partner and forward the new network information To enable network number remapping select Enable Network Number Remapping and toggle it to Yes You should enable network number remapping if you plan on using AURP when connecting to unknown AppleTalk networks for example when Accept Connections from Anyone is enabled With remapping the Netopia R2121 will substitute network numbers not used by your network for the numbers of other remote networks These safe remappings will only be used by local routers on your network remote routers will not be aware of the remapping When network number remapping is enabled you must choose a safe range of network numbers as a destination for the remapping A safe range of network numbers does not intersect your local AppleTalk network s range of network numbers To choose a destination range for the remapping select From under Remap into Range and enter a starting value Then select To and enter an ending value Make sure the range you choose is large enough to accommodate all expected incoming AURP network numbers To improve the efficiency of remapping network numbers into a safe range select Cluster Remote Networks and toggle it to Yes This setting takes any number of remote networks be
273. tView icon For information on other advanced monitoring tools built into your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router see Monitoring Tools on page 13 1 4 6 User s Reference Guide Connecting Your Local Area Network 5 1 Chapter 5 Connecting Your Local Area Network This chapter describes how physically to connect the Netopia R2121 to your local area network LAN Before you proceed make sure the Netopia R2121 is properly configured You can customize the Router s configuration for your particular LAN requirements using Console based Management see Console based Management on page 6 1 This section covers the following topics m Overview on page 5 1 m Readying computers on your local network on page 5 1 m Connecting to an Ethernet network on page 5 3 m Adding a third modem on page 5 5 m Connecting to a LocalTalk network on page 5 6 Overview You can connect the Netopia R2121 to an IP or IPX network that uses Ethernet If you have purchased the AppleTalk feature expansion kit you can also connect the Router to a LocalTalk network that uses PhoneNET cabling Additionally you can connect a third external modem See Adding a third modem below Caution Before connecting the Netopia R2121 to any AppleTalk LANs that contain other AppleTalk routers you should read Routers and seeding on page 12 3 See the sections later in this chapter for details on how to connect the
274. te Before continuing make sure that you have the information that your telephone service provider ISP or network administrator has given you to configure the Netopia Router The Netopia Router s first console screen Main Menu appears in the terminal emulation window of the attached PC or Macintosh when m the Netopia Router is turned on m the computer is connected to the Netopia Router m the Telnet or terminal emulation software is running and configured correctly 7 2 User s Reference Guide A screen similar to the following appears Netopia R2121 v4 3 Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration You always start from this main screen If you do not see the Main Menu verify that the computer used to view the console screen has its serial port connected to the Netopia R2121 s Console port or an Ethernet connection to one of its Ethernet ports See Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router on page 6 3 or Connecting through a Telnet session on page 6 2 the Telnet or terminal emulation software is configured for the recommended values if you are connecting via the Console port the console s serial port is not being used by another device such as an internal modem or an application Turn off all other programs other than
275. te network is their source From the perspective of an output filter your local network is the source of the packets and the remote network is their destination Type of filter source means destination means Input filter the remote network the local network Output filter the local network the remote network Adding filters to a filter set In this section you ll learn how to add an input filter to a filter set Adding an output filter works exactly the same way providing you keep the different source and destination perspectives in mind To add an input filter select Add Input Filter in the Add IP Filter Set screen and go to the Add Filter screen Select Add Output Filter to add an output filter 14 16 User s Reference Guide Add Filter Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 0 ADD THIS FILTER NOW CANCEL Enter the IP specific information for this filter To make the filter active in the filter set select Enabled and toggle it to Yes If Enabled is toggled to No the filter can still exist in the filter set but it will have no effect If you want the filter to forward packets that match its criteria to the destination IP address select Forward and toggle it to Yes If Forward is toggled to No pac
276. ted on the Netopia Web site Monitoring with SmartView 4 1 Chapter 4 Monitoring with SmartView This chapter discusses SmartView the Netopia R2121 s device and network web based monitoring tool This tool can provide statistical information report on current network status record events and help in diagnosing and locating problems This section covers the following topics m SmartView overview on page 4 1 m Navigating SmartView on page 4 2 SmartView overview SmartView is a Java based applet that runs in a web browser window It intermittently polls the Router for information to monitor the Router s state and control connection and disconnection of Connection Profiles SmartView should run under any Java Virtual Machine J VM enabled browser and is therefore platform independent Note The SmartView applet will only run under J ava enabled browsers Be sure that the browser you are using is at least Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 3 0 or higher or Netscape Navigator Version 3 0 or Communicator Version 4 0 or higher If your browser does not meet this requirement you can upgrade with a browser supplied on the Netopia CD Using SmartView you can view your Router s Connection Profile Machine Information Information History Logs Model Profile Name Device Firmware Version Dial out Profile WAN Ethernet IP address Dial Number Update Date Bandwidth Type Time Dial Direction
277. tem at the top of the table and press the Return key To scroll down select the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the table and press the Return key The table has the following columns Net Displays the starting network number supplied by the AppleTalk router in the Next Rtr Addr Column If a network number is preceded by an asterisk it has multiple zones To display the zones select the network entry and press Return Range Displays the ending network number for the extended network Def Zone Name Displays the zone or zones associated with the specified network or network range The zone name shown is either the only zone or the default zone name for an extended network To see the complete list of zones for an extended network with multiple zones select the entry in the table and press the Return key Press the Return key again to close the list of zones Hops Displays the number of routers between the Netopia R2121 and the specified network State Displays the state of the specified route based on the frequency of Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP packets received for the route The state can be Good Suspect or Bad AppleTalk routers regularly exchange RTMP packets to update AppleTalk routing information Next Rtr Addr Displays the DDP or IP address of the next hop for the specified route A DDP address is displayed if the router shown is on the local AppleTalk network DDP address means that a connection to
278. tents iii Easy Setup Securicam 74 Chapter 8 WAN and System Configuration eccerre 8 1 Creating a new Connection Profile eec 8 2 Viewing or editing connection profiles 0 0 0 8 6 Deleting connection profiles cccccccsssssseeeeeeeess 8 7 System Configuration SCr enS siseciscseeeissecesesssecerevseceveniss 8 8 Navigating through the System Configuration screens 8 8 System Configuration features cesses 8 9 Network Protocols S tUp ccccssvcsdisiecaceivesnien 8 11 Filter Sets FirewallS cccccccccccsscseeeeeeeeeseuerevenss 8 11 IP Address SEIANGscicvessncccieraketdnteikeadns 8 11 Daie ana ANG eee a EN 8 11 Console Conhgura tiisin ia 8 12 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 8 13 Ea A E E EE 8 13 Upgrade Feature SOE cinistdsocisndisiantedarimdsndnetmasntass 8 13 LOIG rns EENE weskinus 8 13 Installing the Syslog CII Nt ccceceeseeceeeseeeeeeees 8 14 Chapter 9 Managing Voice and Data Calls acn 9 1 Specifying telephone connections escenes 9 2 Default Answer Profile for Dialin Connections 4 9 4 How the Default Answer Profile works accen 9 4 Scheduled CONMECHONG scissiisinininsaicinnnndeaes 9 7 Cost control feature call accounting eneee 9 12 Viewing call accounting statistics cccceee 9 14 Chapter 10 IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address TANS AtlONessesndssaveccccs sncasessavecdadcnacanssseecodedestinacs 10 1 Network Address Translation features eccere
279. teps to configure IP Setup for your Netopia R2121 Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the Netopia R2121 s Ethernet port Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for the Ethernet IP Address that you entered in the last step Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a default gateway This can be the address of any major router accessible to the Netopia R2121 A default gateway should be able to successfully route packets when the Netopia R2121 cannot recognize the intended recipient s IP address A typical example of a default gateway is the ISP s router Select DNS Server and enter the IP address for a domain name server The domain name server matches the alphabetic addresses favored by people for example robin hood com to the IP addresses actually used by IP routers for example 163 7 8 202 If a secondary DNS server is available select Secondary DNS Server and enter its IP address The secondary DNS server is used by the Netopia R2121 when the primary DNS server is inaccessible Entering a secondary DNS is useful but it is not necessary Select Domain Name and enter your network s domain name for example netopia com Entering a Domain Name is strongly recommended Select Exported Services The Exported Services screen appears with three options Show Change Exports Add Export and Delete Export Exported Services Local Port to IP Address Remapping Show Change Exports
280. ter 13 Monitoring Tools ece 13 1 Quick View status OVETVEW wassciccssssiccrsasscaccussececeunsseanies 13 1 General Stals iania 13 2 CETE SEOS udii 13 3 Status MOS dicendae 13 3 Statistics CLOIS cscccsesdeevaeiseapanasnsvatasoanunaisienaenan anes 134 General SAUSUCS snncsciinsiiunarai 134 Evom MOINES sinai 135 Routio TAPE Siscia 13 8 Served IP Addres ES acreencias 13 11 Systemi IM Orna ar A 13 13 SNMP osetrene A 1313 The SNMP Setup Stheeh ie cccseiesssicdesseeseccianseers 13 14 SNP cs ote Reena renee creat SE 13 15 Chapter 14 S QCUMY 14 aseistacisewereaahetart nan Meaheaan 14 1 Suggested security Measures seeren 14 1 WSF BEE OUNO reid 14 2 Danm Console ACCESS uinnean 14 3 Enable SmartStart SmartView Web Server 144 WCE AG CF ooon aa a ES 144 About filters and filter Sets sorsomra 144 What s a filter and what s a filter set an 144 HOW filter sets WOK aicsscccesseseccesees sce veusseeesaaasreseis 145 How individual filters WOrkK ccccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeees 14 7 Design GUIGBI MSS sc cississccesnseaccieriaeetedeneccsssiaees 14 11 Working with IP filters and filter sets 14 12 Adding SNE SOU ncsisitnmrienndnninncnasis 14 13 US VAM TRE SOE sax sian aa nE EEA 14 17 Modifying filter Sets cccccccsssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 14 18 Deleting a THEN Setorani 14 18 A sample IP filter set si cccenvesvessisa petsvovesecssansaness 14 18 OP Te r rican inant tence 14 22 vi User s Reference Guide EX parket HINGIS sari
281. ter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Enter the IP specific information for this filter Filter Basics In the source or destination IP address fields the IP address that is entered MUST be the NETWORK address of the subnet A HOST address can be entered but the applied subnet mask must be 32 bits 255 255 255 255 The Netopia R2121 has the ability to compare source and destination TCP or UDP ports These options are as follows Item What it means No compare Does not compare TCP or UDP port Not Equal To Matches any port other than what is defined Less Than Anything less than the port defined 14 34 User s Reference Guide Less Than Or Equal Any port less than or equal to the port defined Equal Matches only the port defined Greater Than or Equal Matches the port or any port greater Greater Than Matches anything greater than the port defined Example Network Incoming Packet Filter Internet IP 200 1 1 DATA Example Filters Example 1 Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 28 IP Address Binary Representation 200 1 1 28 00011100 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Perform the logical AND 00000000 Logical AND result Security 14 35 This i
282. ter include m Specifying telephone connections on page 9 2 m Default Answer Profile for Dial in Connections on page 94 m Scheduled connections on page 9 7 m Cost control feature call accounting on page 9 12 9 2 User s Reference Guide Specifying telephone connections You can configure telephone connections in the WAN Configuration screen under the Main Menu Select WAN Wide Area Network Setup WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile Default Answer Profile Scheduled Connections Call Accounting Configuration Establish WAN Connection Disconnect WAN Connection Return Enter for WAN line configuration From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information The Internal Modem Configuration screen appears Internal Modem Configuration Modem Dialing Prefix ATDT PBX Dialing Prefix Line 1 Directory Number Answer on Ring Type Any Line 2 Directory Number Answer on Ring Type Any Speaker On Always Speaker Volume 2 Medium Aux Serial Port Async Modem Data Rate kbps 57 6 Aux Modem Init String AT amp F amp C1 amp D2E0S0 1 Aux Modem Directory Number Enter the dialing prefix to be sent to all modems Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company m You can enter a PBX or Centrex Dialing Prefix such as 9 i
283. ter the scope m To serve DHCP clients with the IP address of a NetBIOS name server select Serve NetBIOS Name Server and toggle it to Yes Select NetBIOS Name Server IP Address and enter the IP address for the NetBIOS name server You are now finished setting up DHCP NetBIOS Options To return to the IP Address Serving screen press the Escape key once m To enable BootP s address serving capability select Serve BOOTP Clients and toggle to Yes Note Addresses assigned through BOOTP are permanently allocated from the IP Address Serving pool until you release them To view all of the IP addresses currently being served by the Netopia R2121 from the Statistics amp Logs menu select Served IP Addresses Main Statistics Served IP Menu amp Logs Addresses 10 20 User s Reference Guide The Served IP Addresses screen appears Served IP Addresses Type Expires Client Identifier SCROLL UP EN 08 00 07 16 0c 85 BOOTP 00 44 EN 00 00 c5 4a 1f ea 192 192 Lease Management EN Ethernet Address AT AppleTalk Address CP Profile Name HX hex To release these addresses select Lease Management IP Address Lease Management Reset All Leases Release BootP Leases Reclaim Declined Addresses Hit RETURN ENTER you will return to the previous screen Select Release BootP Leases and press Return For more lease management information see Served IP Addresses on page 13 11 IP Setup Smart
284. the diagram why the term nested is appropriate for describing these subnets Address range available to a b c 0 less the two nested subnets valid addresses used by a b c 128 valid addresses used 249 by a b c 248 Broadcasts As mentioned earlier binary IP host or subnet addresses composed entirely of ones or zeros are reserved for broadcasting A broadcast packet is a packet that is to be delivered to every host on the network if both the host address and the subnet address are all ones or all zeros or to every host on the subnetwork if the host address is all ones or all zeros but the subnet address is a combination or zeros and ones Instead of making many copies of the packet individually addressed to different hosts all the host machines know to pay attention to broadcast packets as well as to packets addressed to their specific individual host addresses Depending on the age and type of IP equipment you use broadcasts will be addressed using either all zeros or all ones but not both If your network requires zeros broadcasting you must configure this through SNMP Packet header types As previously mentioned IP works with other protocols to allow communication over IP networks When IP is used on an Ethernet network IP works with the Ethernet or 802 3 framing standards among other protocols These two protocols specify two different ways to organize the very first signals in the sequence of electrical signa
285. the number as you would dial it including any required prefixes such as area access and long distance dialing codes Note When placing a multi channel call the answering equipment must either m beina hunt group where a single telephone number services multiple lines or m the answering side must implement MP or BAP as a method to advise the calling side what number s to use ISPs or corporate IS groups will meet these conditions For other non standard dialup connections you should verify that one or the other of these conditions is true To enable address translation toggle Address Translation Enabled to Yes For more information on Network Address Translation see IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 Select Local WAN IP Address and enter the local WAN address your ISP gave you 7 4 User s Reference Guide The default address is 0 0 0 0 which allows for dynamic addressing when your ISP assigns an address each time you connect However you may enter another address if you want to use static addressing m When using numbered interfaces the Netopia Router will use its local WAN IP address and subnet mask to send packets to the remote router Both routers have WAN IP addresses and subnet masks associated with the connection m When using unnumbered interfaces the Netopia Router will use either its local Ethernet IP address or its NAT address if so configured and subnet mask to send pac
286. the table without deleting the filter Viewing filter sets To display a view only list of filter sets select Display Change Filter Sets in the IP Filter Sets screen 14 18 User s Reference Guide Modifying filter sets To modify a filter set select Display Change Filter Set in the Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets Select a filter set from the list and press Return to go to the Change IP Filter Set screen The items in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Filter screen see Adding filters to a filter set on page 14 15 Change IP Filter Set Filter Set Name Basic Firewall Display Change Input Filter Add Input Filter Delete Input Filter Display Change Output Filter Add Output Filter Delete Output Filter Deleting a filter set Note If you delete a filter set all of the filters it contains are deleted as well To reuse any of these filters in another set you ll have to note their configuration before deleting the current filter set and then recreate them To delete a filter set select Delete Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set A sample IP filter set This section contains the settings for a filter set called Basic Firewall which is part of the Netopia R2121 s factory configuration Bas
287. ting up IP routing with a Class A Address or even multiple Class C Addresses subnetting is fairly straightforward Subnetting a single Class C address between two networks however is more complex This section describes the general procedures for subnetting a single Class C network between two Netopia routers so that each can have Internet access C 4 User s Reference Guide Network configuration Below is a diagram of a simple network configuration The ISP is providing a Class C address to the customer site and both networks A and B want to gain Internet access through this address Netopia R2121 B connects to Netopia R2121 A and is provided Internet access through Routers A and B ISP Network Customer Site A PC 1 IP Address 192 168 1 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Router B IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Remote IP 10 0 0 1 Remote Sub 255 255 255 0 Router A Gateway 10 0 0 1 IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Static Route 192 168 1 128 network 255 255 255 128 mask 192 168 1 2 via router Usable IP Addresses available to Customer Site A 192 168 1 1 gt 192 168 1 126 IP Address 192 168 1 130 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 129 Customer Site B Netopia R2121 A IP Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask
288. tion unreachable from Ping test was able to reach the router with IP address W X Y Z w x y Z which reported that the test could not reach the final destination Couldn t allocate packet buffer Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Couldn t open ICMP port Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Packets Out The number of packets sent by the Ping test Packets In The number of return packets received from the target host To be considered on time return packets are expected back before the next packet in the sequence of Ping packets is sent A count of the number of late packets appears in parentheses to the right of the Packets In count In the example below a Netopia R2121 is sending Ping packets to another host which responds with return Ping packets Note that the second return Ping packet is considered to be late because it is not received by the Netopia R2121 before the third Ping packet is sent The first and third return Ping packets are on time 15 4 User s Reference Guide time send Ping packet 1 Netopia gt receive Ping packet 1 host t receive return Ping packet 1 i send Ping packet 2 oS receive Ping packet 2 send return Ping packet 2 h st send Ping packet 3 receive return Ping packet 2 Packets Lost The number of packets unaccounted for shown in total and as a percentage of total packets sent This statistic may be updated during the P
289. tions and press return the Telco Options screen appears Telco Options Dial Dial In Out Dialing Prefix Number to Dial Alternate Site to Dial Dial on Demand Idle Timeout seconds CNA Validation Number Callback Return Enter to allow dialing out dialing in or both In this Screen you configure options for the ways you will establish a link Select Dial and press Return A pop up menu appears You can select the dialing options for this Connection Profile as Dial In Only Dial Out Only or Dial In Out You can m add a dialing prefix such as 9 for an outside line on a PBX or Centrex phone system m add the number to dial for this Connection Profile 8 6 User s Reference Guide m add an alternate number to use if the first number fails to connect m change any of the default parameter settings When you are finished with these entries press Escape to return to the Add Connection Profile screen 9 Select ADD PROFILE NOW and press Return Your new Connection Profile will be added Viewing or editing connection profiles If you want to view or edit the connection profiles in your router return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Display Change Connection Profile The list of Connection Profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop up screen WAN Configuration IP Address IPX Network Easy Setup Profile 127 0 0 2 Profile 02 0 0 0 0 Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return
290. tions screen and press Return The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears Add Scheduled Connection Scheduled Connection Enable On How Often Weekly Schedule Type Forced Up Set Weekly Schedule Use Connection Profile ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION CANCEL Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once Only basis Follow these steps to configure the new scheduled connection To activate the connection select Scheduled Connection Enable and toggle it to On You can make the scheduled connection inactive by toggling Scheduled Connection Enable to Off Decide how often the connection should take place by selecting How Often and choosing Weekly or Once 9 10 User s Reference Guide Only from the pop up menu m The Schedule Type item directly below How Often allows you to set the type of schedule Options are Selection Behavior Forced Up the default establishes and maintains the connection for the schedule period specified Forced Down tears down and prevents any connection for the schedule period specified Demand Allowed permits demand calls for the schedule period specified Demand Blocked blocks demand calls for the schedule period specified Periodic establishes and maintains the connection for a specified period for the duration of the scheduled connection m If How Often is set to Weekly the item directly below Schedule Type reads Set Weekly Sch
291. to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return to delete it Press the Escape key to exit the table without deleting the filter IPX SAP filter sets Before IPX SAP filters can be used they must be grouped into sets A SAP filter can be part of more than one filter set Viewing and modifying SAP filter sets To display a table of IPX SAP filter sets select Show Change IPX SAP Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets To modify any of the filter sets in the list select the desired filter set and go to the Change SAP Filter Set screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter Set screen see the previous section Adding a SAP filter set To add a new IPX SAP filter set select Add IPX SAP Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and go to the Add SAP Filter Set screen Add SAP Filter Set Filter Set Name Show Filters Change Action on Match Append Filter Remove Filter ADD FILTER SET NOW CANCEL Configure an IPX Filter Set here You must ADD FILTER SET NOW to save Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter set 1 Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter set 2 To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set select Show Filters Change Action on Match and press Return to go to the Show Filters Change Actions on Match screen Security 14
292. to do is connect your modem to the Auxiliary port and configure its settings in the Line Configuration screens under the WAN Configuration menu For detailed configuration instructions see Specifying telephone connections on page 9 2 5 6 User s Reference Guide For pinout information on the HD 15 to DB 25 modem cable see Pinouts for Auxiliary Port Modem Cable in Appendix G Technical Specifications and Safety Information Connecting to a LocalTalk network If you have purchased the AppleTalk feature expansion kit you can also connect the Router to an AppleTalk network that uses either Ethernet or LocalTalk Refer to the sheet of optional feature set add ons in your Netopia R2121 documentation folio The AppleTalk feature expansion kit includes a dual RJ 11 PhoneNET connector that attaches to the Auxiliary port on the Netopia R2121 Netopia R2121 Auxiliary port for connecting to LocalTalk Ethernet onsale Power Normal Uplink lem Fil Fei h Auxiliary conhection port HD 15 female Connect the male HD 15 end of the LocalTalk cable to the Auxiliary port on your Netopia R2121 Connect the other end of the cable to your LocalTalk network You can use only one connection on the Auxiliary port You cannot use both the PhoneNET connector and an external modem If your LocalTalk network is not based on standard PhoneNET cabling use a PhoneNET o
293. to learn the address from any configured IPX device on the Ethernet network or from the remote IPX network when a call is established 4 To change the default path delay select Ethernet Path Delay and enter a value in ticks This value is used to determine the port cost of using the Ethernet port in IPX RIP calculations 5 To enable NetBIOS packet forwarding select Ethernet NetBIOS Forwarding and toggle it to Yes This parameter will determine whether IPX Packet type 20 packets are forwarded on the Ethernet interface These packets are used by NetBIOS and some other applications 6 Select Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set to filter incoming IPX SAP advertisements on the Ethernet By attaching an incoming SAP filter on the Ethernet you can restrict the number of SAP entries learned on a large IPX network to only those required by remote users connecting to the Netopia R2121 An Ethernet SAP filter must be used with networks that have so many servers advertised that the Netopia R2121 would otherwise exhaust its internal memory storing server entries To attach a SAP filter set first define the filter set using the Filters and Filter Sets option see step 8 below Then select the filter set from the Ethernet Incoming SAP Filter Set pop up menu To detach the filter set select Detach Filter Set IPX Setup 11 5 7 Select Default Gateway Address and enter the network address of the IPX network to which all packets of unknown destination
294. together The Netopia ISDN Router lets you set up a range of network numbers into which remote AppleTalk network numbers are remapped network range A unique set of contiguous numbers associated with an extended network each number in a network range can be associated with up to 253 node addresses node See host non seeding A router setting that causes it to request network number and zone information from any other routers on the network connected to the non seeding port If it receives this information it begins to route packets through that port See also hard seeding seeding seed router and soft seeding packet A group of fixed length binary digits including the data and call control signals that are transmitted through an X 25 packet switching network as a composite whole The data call control signals and possible error control information are arranged in a predetermined format Packets do not always travel the same pathway but are arranged in proper sequence at the destination side before forwarding the complete message to an addressee Packet Switching Network A telecommunications network based on packet switching technology wherein a transmission channel is occupied only for the duration of the transmission of the packet PAP PPP authentication protocol A method for ensuring secure network access Parameter A numerical code that controls an aspect of terminal and or network operation Parameters control such aspects
295. tup on page 12 1 Note AppleTalk requires the optional AppleTalk feature expansion kit Filter Sets Firewalls These screens allow you to configure security on your network by means of filter sets and a basic firewall m Details are given in Security on page 14 1 IP Address Serving These screens allow you to configure IP Address serving on your network by means of DHCP WANIP BootP and with the optional AppleTalk kit MaclP m Details are given in IP address serving on page 10 16 Date and Time You can set the system s date and time in the Set Date and Time screen Select Date and Time in the System Configuration screen and press Return to go to the Set Date and Time screen Set Date and Time System Date Format MM DD YY Current Date MM DD YY 3 16 1998 System Time Format AM PM Current Time 10 29 AM or PM AM Follow these steps to set the system s date and time 8 12 User s Reference Guide 1 Select Current Date and enter the date in the appropriate format Use one or two digit numbers for the month and day and the last two digits of the current year The date s numbers must be separated by forward slashes 2 Select Current Time and enter the time in the format HH MM where HH is the hour using either the 12 hour or 24 hour clock and MM is the minutes 3 Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM Console Configuration You can change the default terminal communications paramet
296. u Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Secure Authentication Monitor Disconnect Telnet Console Session Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Revert to Factory Defaults Restart System 15 2 User s Reference Guide Ping The Netopia R2121 includes a standard Ping test utility A Ping test generates IP packets destined for a particular Ping capable IP host Each time the target host receives a Ping packet it returns a packet to the original sender Ping allows you to see whether a particular IP destination is reachable from the Netopia R2121 You can also ascertain the quality and reliability of the connection to the desired destination by studying the Ping test s statistics To use the Ping utility select Ping in the Statistics Utilities Tests screen and press Return to go to the Ping screen ICMP Ping Name of Host to Ping Packets to Send Data Size Delay seconds START PING Status Packets Out 0 Packets In 0 Packets Lost 0 0 Round Trip Time Min Max Avg 0 000 0 000 0 000 secs Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host to ping Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host To configure and initiate a Ping test follow these steps 1 Select Name of Host to Ping and enter the destination domain name or IP address 2 Select Packets to Send to change the default setting This is the total number of packets to be sent during the Ping test
297. u choose determines which connection profiles are accessible to callers For example if you choose PAP callers using CHAP or no authentication will be dropped by the answer profile To allow calls that only match a connection profile s remote IP and or IPX address m Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes and m set Authentication to None To not allow any incoming calls to connect to the Netopia Router m Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes and m Set the Dial option in the Telco Options screen of every connection profile to Dial Out Only If you select Bandwidth Allocation you can select a value from a pop up window Supported options are Off Auto MP or BAP The Bandwidth Allocation setting will apply to all answered calls Note The Bandwidth Allocation default is BAP You should only choose one of the other options if you are specifically advised to do so by your ISP or administrator Scheduled connections Main WAN Scheduled Menu Configuration Connections You can set a Netopia Router to make scheduled connections using designated connection profiles This is useful for creating and controlling regularly scheduled periods when the router can be used by hosts on your network It is also useful for once only connections that you want to schedule in advance To go to the Scheduled Connections screen select Scheduled Connections in the WAN Configuration screen 9 8 User s Reference Guide Scheduled Conne
298. u create the filter In fact since the mask for the destination IP address is 0 0 0 0 the address for Dest IP Addr could have been anything The mask for Source IP Addr must be 255 255 255 255 since an exact match is desired m Source IP Addr 199 211 211 17 m Source IP address mask 255 255 255 255 m Dest IP Addr 0 0 0 0 m Destination IP address mask 0 0 0 0 Note To learn about IP addresses and masks see Appendix C Understanding IP Addressing Using the tables on page 14 8 find the destination port and protocol numbers the local Telnet port m Proto TCP or 6 m OD Port 23 The filter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet packets containing the source address shown in step 2 m On Yes m Fwd No Security 14 11 This four step process is how we produced the following filter from the original rule Filtering example 2 Suppose a filter is configured to block all incoming IP packets with the source IP address of 200 233 14 0 regardless of the type of connection or its destination The filter would look like this This filter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with the IP network address 200 233 14 0 The 0 at the end of the address signifies any host on the class C IP network 200 233 14 0 If for example the filter is applied to a packet with the source IP address 200 233 14 5 it will block it In this case the mask which does not appear in the table must be set to 255
299. uide Example Working with a Class C subnet C5 Distnibutng IP addresses sciccveccsire connsideerariceenteaidereneinre cs C5 Technical note on subnet masking C4 COMON O saa C 7 Manually distributing IP addresses s sseeseeeeees C 8 USING address SERVING scicistcestcsesvarmsesvieeteencewse ns C8 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses C9 Nested IP SUBES vcciirecesnsicovsuninceceveniceeenncecomlcerunians C 11 Reet SUS iiia C 13 PACket header ypes ancaran C 13 Appendix D Understanding Netopia NAT Behavior D 1 Network Conngura BON carta cassadestividduransaceierariaiintsatchvers D 1 BEETS s LU PA A EE A E D 1 Exported GOMMCES scsidisvaciieapseaiceyparidoaniencegmremiens D 5 POOLE MOES s schcesesssagpanessietndtiadiabaniassesagein D6 COBO nni O D 6 SUNNI aeniea a D 8 Appendix E Binary Conversion Table nnee E 1 Appendix F Further Reading cccccccccccscsssseeeeeseeeeeeeueneneeesess F 1 Appendix G Technical Specifications and Safety Information G 1 Pinouts for Auxiliary Port Modem Cable c G 1 DeSENPIO eina A G 2 Power requirements cirriisirisriiciiriireeniiricreirieaisi G 2 E E E I AE ET G 2 SOMWAPS and PPOROCONS ccccceceuesstexetersdesraeoravivrersbere G 3 PAC ROMANS eerren ER aE G 3 Regulatory MOLES sroisrissirisiomiinika eirian G 3 Important Safety iINStruCtiONS cccccccssssseeeeeeeess G45 Appendix H About 56K Line ACCESS H 1 GOSS AMY cicscies Ga
300. use it cannot match any criteria the second filter has a chance to pass or reject it and so on Because of this hierarchical structure each filter is said to have a priority The first filter has the highest priority and the last filter has the lowest priority Security 14 7 How individual filters work As described above a filter applies criteria to an IP packet and then takes one of three actions A filter s actions m Passes the packet to the local or remote network m Blocks discards the packet m Ignores the packet A filter passes or blocks a packet only if it finds a match after applying its criteria When no match occurs the filter ignores the packet The criteria are based on information contained in the packets A filter is simply a rule that prescribes certain actions based on certain conditions For example the following rule qualifies as a filter A filtering rule Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP address 199 211 211 17 If a match occurs the packet is blocked Here is what this rule looks like when implemented as a filter on the Netopia R2121 To understand this particular filter look at the parts of a filter Parts of a filter A filter consists of criteria based on packet attributes A typical filter can match a packet on any one of the following attributes m The source IP address where th
301. useful when you cannot rely on RIP To go to the Static Routes screen select the Static Routes item in the IP Setup screen IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 13 Static Routes Display Change Static Route Add Static Route Delete Static Route Configure View Delete Static Routes from this and the following Screens Viewing static routes To display a view only table of static routes select Display Change Static Route in the Static Routes screen 127 0 0 2 Select a Static Route to modify The table has the following columns Dest Network The network IP address of the destination network Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the destination network Next Gateway The IP address of the router that will be used to reach the destination network 10 14 User s Reference Guide Priority An indication whether the Netopia R2121 will use the static route when it conflicts with information received from RIP packets Enabled An indication whether the static route should be installed in the IP routing table Adding a static route To add a new Static route select Add Static Route in the Static Routes screen and go to the Add Static Route screen Add Static Route Static Route Enabled Yes Destination Network IP Address Destination Network Subnet Mask Next Gateway IP Address Route Priority Advertise Route Via RIP ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW Configure a new Static Ro
302. users and AURP tunneling for connectivity between remote AppleTalk networks SmartView tool allows for realtime monitoring of router status lights LEDs through one or more information forms on a web based J ava applet Internet browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Microsoft s Internet Explorer may be used for SmartView How to use this guide This guide is designed to be your single source for information about your Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router It is intended to be viewed on line using the powerful features of the Adobe Acrobat Reader The information display has been deliberately designed to present the maximum information in the minimum space on your screen You can keep this document open while you perform any of the procedures described and find useful information about the procedure you are performing You can also print out all of the manual or individual sections if you prefer to work from hard copy rather than on line documentation The pages are formatted to print on standard 8 1 2 by 11 inch paper We recommend that you print on 3 hole punched paper so that you can put the pages in a binder for future reference For your convenience a printed copy is available from Netopia Order part number TER2121 Doc This guide is organized into chapters describing the Netopia R2121 s advanced features You may want to read each chapter s introductory section to familiarize yourself with the various features available U
303. ute in this Screen m To install the static route in the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to Yes To remove the static route from the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to No m Be sure to read the rules on the installation of static routes in the IP routing table See Rules of static route installation on page 10 15 m Select Destination Network IP Address and enter the network IP address of the destination network m Select Destination Network Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask used by the destination network m Select Next Gateway IP Address and enter the IP address for the router that the Netopia R2121 will use to reach the destination network This router does not necessarily have to be part of the destination network but it must at least know where to forward packets destined for that network m Select Route Priority and choose High or Low High means that the static route takes precedence over RIP information Low means that the RIP information takes precedence over the static route m If the static route conflicts with a connection profile the connection profile will always take precedence m To make sure that the static route is known only to the Netopia R2121 select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to No To allow other RIP capable routers to know about the static route select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to Yes When Advertise Route Via RIP is toggled to Y
304. ving see IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation on page 10 1 7 6 User s Reference Guide 7 If IP Address Serving is On select Number of Client IP Addresses Then enter the number of available host addresses for the Netopia R2121 Dual Analog Router to allocate to the client computers on your network This number defaults to the balance of the subnet addresses above the Netopia Router s address 8 If IP Address Serving is On select 1st Client Address and enter the first IP address in the set of allocated served IP addresses 9 Press Return The Easy Setup Security Configuration screen appears Easy Setup Security The Easy Setup Security Configuration screen lets you password protect your Netopia R2121 Input your Write Access Name and Write Access Password with names or numbers totaling up to eleven digits If you password protect the console screens you will be prompted to enter the name and password you have specified every time you log in to the console screens Do not forget your name and password If you do you will be unable to access any of the configuration screens Additional security features are available See Security on page 14 1 Easy Setup Security Configuration It is strongly suggested that you password protect configuration access to your Netopia By entering a Name and Password pair here access via serial Telnet SNMP and Web Server will be password protected Be sure to remember w
305. work very similarly to IP packet filters They filter data traffic coming from or going to remote IPX networks IPX filters can be set up to pass or discard IPX packets based on a number of user defined criteria Like IP filters IPX filters must be grouped in sets that are applied to the answer profile or to connection profiles IPX SAP filters are used for filtering server entries not required to pass over the WAN links When connecting to a large IPX network via dial up connection the transfer of large numbers of SAP entries can consume significant bandwidth on the WAN link Note Using SAP filtering to prevent a server from being advertised does not provide security against that server being accessed IPX packet filtering must be used for that purpose Setting up and using IPX filter sets is a four step process 1 Create the filters to use 2 Create the filter sets to use 3 Add filters to the filter sets 4 Attach the filter sets to the answer profile or to connection profiles You can configure IPX filters and set up IPX filter sets from the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen IPX Filters and Filter Sets Display Change IPX Packet Filters Add IPX Packet Filter Delete IPX Packet Filter Display Change IPX Packet Filter Sets Add IPX Packet Filter Set Delete IPX Packet Filter Set Display Change IPX Sap Filters Add IPX Sap Filter Delete IPX Sap Filter Display Change IPX Sap Filter Sets Add IPX
306. y of hooks to carry out inter application communications and data transfer Essentially NetBIOS is a way for application programs to talk to the network To run an application that works with NetBIOS a non BM network operating system or network interface card must offer a NetBIOS emulator Many vendors either provide a version of NetBIOS to interface with their hardware or emulate its transport layer communications services in their network products A NetBIOS emulator is a program provided by NetWare clients that allow workstations to run applications that support IBM s NetBIOS calls m Select Serve NetBIOS Options and press Return The DHCP NetBIOS Options screen appears DHCP NetBios Options Serve NetBios Type Yes NetBios Type Type B Serve NetBios Scope No NetBios Scope Serve NetBios Name Server No NetBios Name Server IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Configure DHCP served NetBIOS options here m To serve DHCP clients with the type of NetBIOS used on your network select Serve NetBIOS Type and IP Setup SmartIP and Network Address Translation 10 19 toggle it to Yes m From the NetBIOS Type pop up menu select the type of NetBIOS used on your network DHCP NetBios Options Serve NetBios Type NetBios Type Serve NetBios Scope NetBios Scope Serve NetBios Name Server NetBios Name Server IP Addr m To serve DHCP clients with the NetBIOS scope select Serve NetBIOS Scope and toggle it to Yes Select NetBIOS Scope and en
307. y to get you up and running with the minimum difficulty For instructions on this option see Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard on page 3 3 netUpia 2 Small Office connection to the Internet For Small Office connections to the Internet using a block of IP addresses Network Address Translation disabled you should use the following configuration tool m Easy Setup configuration using console based management This option allows maximum flexibility for experienced users and administrators For instructions on this option see Console based Management on page 6 1 and Easy Setup on page 7 1 netUpia 3 Direct Connection to a Corporate Office Telecommuter For direct connections to a Corporate Office you can use either one of two configuration options mf you will be using Network Address Translation use the SmartStart Wizard included on your Netopia R2121 CD For instructions on this option see Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard on page 3 3 m f your corporate office assigns you a static IP address use Easy Setup under console based management This option allows maximum flexibility for experienced users and administrators For instructions on this option see Console based Management on page 6 1 and Easy Setup on page 7 1 netUpia 4 Configured to accept incoming dial up connections To configure the Netopia R2121 to a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Macromedia Flash MX Professional 2004 for Mac, PC  NetScroII Optical  仕 様 書  "user manual"  Philips Indirect light 70980/55/PU  GE DECT 29110 User's Manual  EVGA GeForce 9400 GT GeForce 9400 GT 1GB  JVC AV-27D503 User's Manual  Vous cherchez des stagiaires ?  USER MANUAL - Audio General Inc.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file